CONSTRUCTION  AND  USE  OF 
'LLING 


y**~,  .  :„,  V"'mii*|  '  fffr  ny>>|  .  '  <x****»**i 

HIS  ffil® 
**«^  W^-~i  U*«~^J  U^aw 


IRLF 


7b    7HS 


MfllfllJfi 


r 


REESE  LIBRARY 

OF  Till-. 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 


_n— n — n — rs 


• 


£5  O 
•H-rH 


•73  C3  O 
tfrH 

tf-iH  <D 


-PC         Ctf 

w  0*0'  o 


H  Ctf  Cj  (D 

r<2 

CQ  <LJ 


O  <D  <D  O  O 

CH^  p^  cc  O 


rH       ^  ^  O 

o 

c  cc5 


>*  C  60  (D  O 

<D  > 


PQ  O  O  Cj 

>*£  O  CD 

•*    o  &  r-i 

«5  <D  <D 

~rH   >   (D 

&  «   tf  CQ  ?s 

C'J  J-i^-iH  <D 


CD  Cd  X  O 

CD  CDTj 


•HO    I 

-3        ••  CD  O 


c 

T3 

ui 

it 

•a. 

fe 

| 

r~t  !>: 

lii    '5 
0    03 

s£ 

?                      I 

Ss 

.   s"^ 

^•"H 

NEW  YORK  OFFI 

ctrical  Exchange 

>• 

h 
K 
U 
ID 

j 

(0 

n 

:AGO  OFFICE  & 

<n 

E 

o 

_c 

5 

0 
CO 

S3 

^?1 

^-^rk,^i 

il 

!! 

ii 

CODES  USED 
OUR  OWN  , 
'EBERS  STAN  DA  f 
B.C.  4-™  ED  ITI  O 

f       1™ 
|—  ^o 

C 

-     u 

^§ 

S$ 

•~j  x 

G 

o  JH       O 


p^     i— J^a 

S  <DCH'«H   ^ 


r!£)..: 


•i 


A  TREATISE 


ON   THE 


CONSTRUCTION   AND   USE 


OF 


MILLING  MACHINES 


MADE    ]?Y 


BROWN  &  SHARPS  MFG,  CO,, 
if 

PROVIDENCE,  R.  I.,  U.  S.  A. 


MANUFACTURERS    OF 


MACHINERY  AND  TOOLS. 


PROVIDENCE,    R.    I. 

BROWN  &   SHARPE  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY 

1896. 


Copyrighted 

189G 
By  BROWN  &   SHARPE  MFG.   CO. 


PREFACE. 


Our  chief  object  in  writing^his,  book  is  to  assist  those  who 
are  not  familiar  with  the  construction  or  use  of  Universal  or 
Plain  Milling  Machines.  We  desire  to  aid  in  having  the 
machines  well  understood,  properly  cared  for  and  profitably 
operated.  Beyond  this,  we  hope  we  have  written  somewhat  of 
interest  to  those  well  versed  in  the  theory  and  practice  of 
milling. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE. 


UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINES,  GENERAL  DESCRIPTION      .  i 

DIMENSIONS  OF  UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINES     ....  4 

DESCRIPTION  OF  No.   i   UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINE  .     .  5 

Spindle,  Cone,  Overhanging  Arm,  Table,  Saddle      ....  6 

Knee,  Stop-Rod,  Feed,  Adjustable  Dials,  Indexing  Head-stock  .  7 

Feed  Table 8 

Vise,  Overhead  Works,  Counter-shaft,  Accessories     ....  13 

DESCRIPTION  OF  No.  2   UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINE  .     .  16 

DESCRIPTION  OF  No.  3   UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINE  .     .  26 

DESCRIPTION  OF  No.  4  UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINE  .     .  35 
DESCRIPTION  OF  No.  4  (No.  3   PRIOR  TO  1893)  UNIVERSAL 

MILLING  MACHINE 41 

PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINES 45 

DIMENSION  TABLES 46,  47 

DESCRIPTION  OF  No.  o  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE  ...  49 
DESCRIPTION  OF  No.  i  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE  53 
DESCRIPTION  OF  No.  2  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE  ...  59 
DESCRIPTION  OF  No.  3  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE  ...  65 
DESCRIPTION  OF  No.  4  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE  ...  71 
DESCRIPTION  OF  No.  5  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE  .  77 
DESCRIPTION  OF  No.  12  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE  .  .  .  81 
DESCRIPTION  OF  No.  13  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE  ...  87 
DESCRIPTION  OF  No.  23  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE  ...  91 
DESCRIPTION  OF  No.  24  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE  ...  93 
DESCRIPTION  OF  No,  2  VERTICAL  SPINDLE  MILLING  MA- 
CHINE    96 


VI  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

ATTACHMENTS,  ETC.  : 

PAGE. 

Circular  Milling  Attachment  .  .  .  .  •       97 

Gear  Cutting  Attachment      .  .  .  .  .  .98 

Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Attachments         .  .  99,   102,  103 

High  Speed  Milling  Attachment  and  Driving  Fixture       .  .     103 

Hand  Milling  Attachment     ......     106 

Taper  Milling  Attachment    ......     107 

Index  Head  and  Centres  with  Centre  Rest  .  .  .     108 

Index  Centres,  (Single  Dial)  ,  .  •    .  .     109 

Index  Centres  .  .  .  .  .  .  .no 

Universal  Vise  .  .  .  .  .  .  .     in 

Materials,  Workmanship,  Design,  etc.        .  .  .  -113 

CARE  AND  USE  OF  MILLING  MACHINES  : 

Placing  Machines  and   Counter-shafts,  Diameter  of  Main  Line 

Pulley,  Speed  of  Counter-shafts,  Oiling  .  .  115 

Placing   Tools   in    Closets   of  Machines,   Oil    Pans,    Adjusting 

Spindle     .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .     117 

Milling  Machines  and  Skill          .  .  .  .  .  .119 

CUTTERS  USED  ON  MILLING  MACHINES: 

Fly  Cutter,  Formed  Mills  or  Cutters,  Gang  Cutters          .             .  124 

Outline  Cuts,  Showing  Form  of  Cuts,  Diameter  of  Mills             .  129 

Length  of  Mills,  Diameter  of  Hole,  Temper,  Number  of  Teeth  131 

Cutting  Angle  of  Teeth  of  Mills        .             .             .             .             .  133 

Clearance  of  Mills,  Sketches             .....  134 
Templets,  Sharpening  Mills,  Grade  of  Emery  Wheel,  Width  of 

Face,  Use  of  Wheel         .  .  -136 

Sharpening  Angular  and  Formed  Cutters               .             .             .  137 

EXAMPLES  OF  OPERATIONS  : 

Use  of  Oil  on  the  Cutters  or  Work               .             .                          .  140 
Direction  of  Work  Under  Mills,  Experiments  to  Test  Method  of 

Running  Cutter  .......  141 

Speed  of  Mills,  Average  Speed         .                                                    .  142 

Limits  in  Milling        ...                           ...  143 

Speed  and  Feed  Tables          ....                         .  145 

Pickling  Castings  and  Forgings,  Use  of  Appliances                       -  148 

Examples  of  Work     .....                          .  149 

Use  of  Two  or  Three  Mills  at  One  Time     .             .                          .  150 
Fixtures  for  Small  Work       .                                                                 .152 

Cutting  Slots                ...                                       .  154 

Special  Operations     ....                          .  160 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  vii 

PAGE. 

Milling  Operations  in  the  Manufacture  of  the  No.  i  Universal  Mil- 
ling Machine  Spiral  Head  and  Foot-stock  .  .  .  168 

Milling  Operations  in  the  Manufacture  of  the  No.  2  Universal  Mil- 
ling Machine  .......  170 

DIRECT  INDEXING  : 

Use  of  Indexing  Head,  Index  Plate               ....  176 

Sector  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .178 

Index  Tables  .......         179,  180 

Dividing  Cutters,  etc.,  Fluting  Taps  and  Reamers             .             .  182 

Table  for  Setting  when  Using  Tap  or  Reamer  Cutter       .             .  183 

Cutting  Gears              .......  184 

Worm  Wheels,  Worm  Hob   .            .            .             .             .           ..  186 

COMPOUND  INDEXING  :  .  .          .  .  .  .188 

Use  of  Machines  in  Compound  Indexing    ....     189 

Approximate  Indexing  by  Compound  Method       .  .  .     190 

Compound  Index  Tables        .  .  .        191,   192,   193,   194,   195 

Extra   Divisions    Obtained  by  Use  of   Adjustable    Back    Pin, 

Compound  Indexing       ......     198 

Cutting  Bevel  Gears  in  a  Universal  Milling  Machine.     O.  J.  Beale      200 

CUTTING  SPIRALS  WITH  UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINES  : 

Selection  of  Change  Gears    .  .  .  .  .  .212 

Rules  for  Obtaining  Ratio  of  Gears  ....     214 

Rules  for  Determining  Number  of  Teeth    .  .  .  .214 

Rules  for  Ascertaining  Spiral  Cut  by  Any  Given  Change  Gears, 

Position  of  the  Spiral  Bed  in  Cutting  Spirals         .         .         .215 
Use  of  Machines  in  Cutting  Spirals  ....     216 

Tables  of  Change  Gears,  Spirals  and  Angles         .   218,  219,  220,  221 
Natural  Tangents  and  Cotangents  .  .  .         222,  223 

Setting  for  Spiral  Mill  Cutting         .  .  .  .     224 

Twist  Drills     ........     225 

Table  of  Cutters  for  Making  Straight  Lipped  Twist  Drills  .     229 

Table  of  Cutters  for  Making  Twist  Drills  .  .  .  -230 

Cutting  Spirals  with  End  Mills        .  .  .  .  -231 


FIGURES  SHOWING  CAPACITY  OF  MACHINES. 

We  have  placed  in  connection  with  the  name  and  immediately 
under  the  number  of  each  machine,  the  figures  that  best  indicate 
its  capacity — the  object  being  to  assist  those  who  desire  to  quickly 
compare  machines,  or  wish  to  remember  or  designate  them  by 
their  size  in  a  way  that  is  customary  with  lathes  and  planing 
machines. 

The  first  figure  indicates  the  automatic  longitudinal  feed  of 
table,  the  second  its  transverse  movement  and  the  third  the 
distance  it  can  be  lowered  from  the  centre  of  spindle. 

For  example  the  No.  i  Universal  Milling  Machine  is  headed 
No.  i,  17  in.  x  6  in.  x  18  in.  Universal  Milling  Machine,  and 
indicates  that  the  table  has  an  automatic  longitudinal  feed  of  1 7 
in.,  a  transverse  movement  of  6  in.,  and  can  be  lowered  18  in. 
from  centre  of  spindle. 

DIMENSIONS  OF  MACHINES. 

The  Dimensions  and  Details  of  Machines  given  are  for  the 
machines  made  at  the  time  of  issuing  this  treatise.  Changes 
which  may  be  made  in  future  lots  will  be  indicated  in  the  edition 
of  the  catalogue  next  following  such  change.  Catalogues  are 
mailed  on  application. 


UNIVERSAL  HILLING  MACHINES. 


A  Universal  has  all  the  movements  of  a  Plain  Machine,  and 
in  addition,  the  table  is  fed  automatically  at  various  angles  to 
the  axis  of  the  spindle,  and  the  spiral  head  is  so  made  and  con- 
nected with  the  feed  screw  that  a  positive  rotary  movement  may 
be  given  to  the  work. 

Besides  doing  the  work  of  a  Plain  Milling  Machine  it  can 
thus  be  used  for  an  almost  unlimited  variety  of  other  operations 
in  the  manufacture  of  machinery  and  tools. 

"  Peculiarly  American  in  its  design  and  construction*,  this 
machine  has  done  more  for  the  introduction  and  demand  for 
American  machinery  in  Europe  than  any  other. 

"As  exhibited  by  J.  R.  Brown  &  Sharpe  in  1867  at  the  Paris 
Exhibition,  it  attracted  the  attention  of  engineers,  machine  tool 
builders,  gun  and  sewing  machine  makers,  and  the  directors  of 
government  arsenals  and  other  large  engineering  works.  It  was 
one  of  those  special  tools  by  the  aid  of  which  Americans  have 
been  enabled  to  so  far  improve  the  construction  of  their 
machinery,  that  they  were  at  once  successful  competitors  for 
large  orders  of  special  and  other  machinery  for  governments  and 
other  large  industries.  Europe  from  that  time  forward  could 
not  afford  to  be  without  the  Universal  Milling  Machine.  Those 
sent  for  exhibition  were  sold,  soon  after  the  opening,  to  Conti- 
nental machine  tool  builders,  ostensibly  for  the  purpose  of 
using  them  as  copies  from  which  to  build  others. 

"  The  workmanship  on  these  machines  was  of  such  a  quality 
that  the  purchasers  found  difficulty  in  producing  others  of  equal 
character,  except  certain  parts  which  were  reproduced  on  these 
same  tools ;  thus  showing  the  imperative  necessity  of  parent 
tools  containing  within  their  own  structure  the  inherent  qualities 
of  truth  and  the  highest  excellence. 

"  One  of  the  minor  virtues  in  a  good  machine  tool  is  general 
convenience,  easy  access  to  the  various  parts,  the  arrangement 
of  handles  for  manipulation,  and  their  being  so  combined  that  the 

^American  Machinist,  April,  1879,  referring  to  No.  i  Universal  Milling-  Machine. 


2  BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 

attendant  has  not  to  waste  his  time  in  moving  from  the  point  of 
action  in  order  to  reach  them.  Another  highly  important  point 
is  that  every  tool  should  not  only  be  sufficiently  well  made,  but 
that  the  means  of  adjustment  and  compensation  for  wear  should 
be  such  that  the  general  soundness  of  the  fitting  can  be  main- 
tained, and  that  the  work  produced  by  the  machine  during  its  life 
time  should  be  perfect,  and  require  no  fitting  afterwards.  This  is 
the  true  condition  to  be  reached  with  tools,  and  a  high  standard  is 
not  secured  unless  the  tool  has  a  combination  of  all  the  virtues 
which  should  characterize  a  machine  tool  in  this  age  of  special 
machinery. 

"At  the  Vienna  Exhibition  of  1873,  Continental  tool  builders 
exhibited  their  copies  of  American  Universal  Milling  Machines 
and  Revolving  Head  Screw  Machines,  "  System  Brown  &  Sharpe," 
(so  noted  in  the  illustrated  catalogue  of  one  firm).  Decidedly  the 
best  copies  of  these  machines  were  those  exhibited  by  the  Alsatian 
firm  of  Ducommun  &  Steinlen  of  Mulhouse. 

"At  this  exhibition,  however,  preference  was  given  to  the  tools 
exhibited  by  Brown  &  Sharpe,  and  the  consequence  was  that  their 
tools  were  sold  earlier  and  at  a  better  price  than  the  copies,  some 
of  which  were  very  creditable. 

"  The  late  Paris  Exhibition  was  especially  rich  in  creditable 
productions  of  machinery  of  American  design,  very  notable  among 
which  were  copies  of  the  Brown  &  Sharpe  Universal  Milling- 
Machine. 

"  These  were  exhibited  by  several  tool  builders  in  the  French, 
as  also  by  a  prominent  English  firm  in  the  British  section,  who 
were  considerably  chagrined  at  the  reply  of  the  International 
Judges,  who,  in  answer  to  their  appeal  for  an  award  higher  than 
the  silver  medal  (of  which  they  had  received  notice),  informed 
them  that  with  machinery  as  with  the  fine  arts,  '  copies  were  not 
entitled  to  so  high  an  award  as  were  the  originals.' 

"  No  gold  medal  awarded  was  more  deserved  than  that  given 
the  Brown  &  Sharpe  Manufacturing  Co.,  for  their  fine  exhibit  of 
special  machine  tools,  from  which  Continental  and  other  firms  are 
now  constructing  their  copies." 

"  In  1889  at  the  Paris  Exposition  our  exhibit  was  again  honored. 
It  received  the  "  Grand  Prix,"  the  highest  possible  distinction. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.     CO.  3 

The  Universal  Milling  Machine,  illustrated  and  described  in  the 
following  pages,  form,  with  the  exception  of  the  No.  4,  a  series 
of  machines  which  was  presented  to  the  public  generally  for  the 
first  time  at  the  World's  Columbian  Exposition  in  Chicago  in 
1893.  In  connection  with  this  line  of  the  new  machines  we 
exhibited  the  first  No.  i  Universal  Milling  Machine  made  by  us. 
This  machine,  patented  by  Joseph  R.  Brown  in  1865,  and 
extensively  copied  both  in  America  and  Europe,  illustrated  most 
completely  the  fact,  that  notwithstanding  the  number  of  years 
since  its  construction,  there  had  been  no  changes  in  the  funda- 
mental principles  of  Universal  Milling  Machines. 

Improvements  of  greater  or  less  importance  have  been  made  in 
the  machines  from  time  to  time,  and  we  have  embodied  in  their 
construction  what  we  believe  to  be  the  best,  making  them  more 
convenient,  rigid,  and  better  adapted  for  the  class  of  work  for 
which  they  are  intended. 

The  following  are  some  of  the  important  features  that  have  been 
applied  to  all  of  the  machines  of  this  series  : 

i  st.  The  Clamp  Bed  and  Saddle  are  held  together  by  three 
bolts,  far  enough  from  the  centre  about  which  the  Saddle  swivels 
to  hold  the  parts  firmly  in  whatever  position  they  may  be  placed, 
making  it  possible  to  take  heavier  cuts  with  less  liability  to 
chatter. 

2nd.  The  Table  Feed  is  at  the  centre,  and  is  automatic  in 
either  direction  and  changed  by  simply  operating  a  lever.  This 
construction  allows  the  table  to  be  fed  automatically  when  swung 
around  to  45°  either  way.  The  Feed  Stops  are  positive  in  their 
action. 

3rd.  The  Feed  Connection  is  with  the  Knee  instead  of  the 
Table,  which  makes  it  possible  to  cut  any  angle  of  spiral  within 
the  capacity  of  the  machines  without  interference  of  the  Universal 
Joints,  and  the  top  is  clear  for  long  work.  The  Foot  Stock  may 
be  removed  without  taking  out  the  bolt. 

4th.  The  Centre  in  Overhanging  Arm  is  adjustable,  and  the 
Spindle  is  provided  with  a  thread  on  the  end,  so  that  a  face  mill, 
chuck,  etc.,  can  be  used. 

5th.  The  Table  is  provided  with  a  pan  and  channels  for 
receiving  the  oil. 


DIMENSIONS  OF  UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINES, 


NO,    OF   MACHINE.                     1 

2 

3 

4* 

No.  of  Ta*per  Hole 

. 

in  Spindle.                        10 

10 

11 

11 

Distance  from  Cen- 

* 

tre  of  Spindle  to 

O.  H.  Arm. 

5  1-2" 

5  1-2" 

63-8" 

71-4" 

Greatest    Distance 

from  End  of  Spin- 

dle to  Centre  in 

O.  H.  Arm. 

10  1-2" 

14" 

18" 

24" 

Back  Geared. 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Working  Surface  of 

Table.                         28  "x5  1-8" 

32"x63-4" 

40"x8" 

48''x93^" 

Transverse     move- 

ment of  Table. 

6" 

0  1-2" 

7  1-2" 

8  1-2" 

Greatest    Distance 

from     Centre    of 

Spindle  to  Top  of 

Table, 

18" 

17  1-2" 

18  1-2" 

19" 

Length    of     Auto- 

matic Feed, 

17" 

20  1-2" 

25" 

28  1-2" 

No,  of  changes   of 

Feed. 

6 

12 

16 

12 

Variations  in  Feed 

to    one    Rev.     of 

.004"  to 

.005"  to 

.003"  to 

.004"  to 

Spindle, 

.073 

.120" 

.302" 

.214" 

Index    Centres 

Swing. 

8" 

10" 

12" 

14" 

Index    Centres 

Take. 

14" 

15" 

21" 

26" 

Net  Weight. 

1570  Ibs. 

1750  Ibs. 

2800  Ibs. 

4150  Ibs. 

Floor  Space. 

61"x59" 

70-x66" 

84-x75" 

98"x87" 

•Design  1S93. 


BROWN'    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

No.  1 

1  7  in.  x  6  in.  x  18  in. 

UNIVERSAL   MILLING    MACHINE 

DESIGN    OF    1895. 


The  table  has  an  automatic  longitudinal  feed  of  1 7 ",  a  trans- 
verse movement  of  6",  and  can  be  lowered  18"  from  centre  of 
spindle. 

The  centres  swing  8"  in  diameter  and  take  14"  in  length. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


Ho.  1  UNIYERSAL  MILLING  MACHINE. 


The  size  and  capacity  of  the  No.  i  Universal  Milling  Machine 
adapt  it  for  use  in  the  ordinary  shop. 

It  is  pre-eminently  a  tool  making  machine,  as  is  indicated  by 
the  fact  that  in  the  department  where  we  make  our  jigs  and 
fixtures,  there  are  nearly  as  many  No.  i  Universal  Milling 
Machines  as  engine  lathes.  In  all  we  have  about  forty  of  these 
machines  in  operation  in  our  shops. 

The  Spindle  has  a  hole  \\"  in  diameter  its  entire  length, 
and  at  the  front  end  a  No.  10  taper  hole.  The  spindle  is 
ground  and  lapped  and  runs  in  bronze  boxes  that  can  be 
adjusted.  The  front  box  can  be  tightened  by  the  nut  A,  Figure  8, 
which  brings  the  shoulder  of  the  spindle  against  washers  in  front 
of  the  frame  of  the  machine.  The  rear  box  is  adjusted  by 
tightening  the  nut  C ;  the  front  end  of  spindle  is  threaded,  and 
is  provided  with  a  guard  nut  D,  which  protects  the  thread  when 
not  in  use. 

The  Cone  has  four  steps,  the  largest  10^"  in  diameter, 
for  3"  belt. 

The  Overhanging  Arm  has  an  adjustable  centre,  and  can 
be  easily  reversed  to  receive  an  attachment,  turned  out  of  the 
way,  or  removed.  The  distance  from  the  centre  of  the  spindle 
to  the  arm  is  5^2";  greatest  distance  from  end  of  spindle  to 
centre  in  arm,  io*4" 

The  Table,  including  oil  channels  and  pans,  is  31"  long  and 
6y2"  wide,  has  a  working  surface  28"  x  5^6",  and  a  T-slot  S/8" 
wide.  By  means  of  the  shaft  C,  Figure  8,  it  can  be  moved 
transversely  6".  One  revolution  of  the  shaft  moves  the  table  .2". 

The  Saddle,  which  carries  the  table,  pivots  in  the  clamp  bed, 
and  is  rigidly  clamped  to  it  by  three  bolts,  which  slide  in  circular 
slots  and  allow  the  table  to  be  set  at  any  angle  to  45°  either  way 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  7 

from  zero.  The  saddle  and  knee  are  clamped  by  nuts  with 
fixed  handles,  thus  dispensing  with  wrenches. 

The  Knee  can  be  moved  so  that  the  top  of  the  table  at  its 
lowest  point  will  be  18"  from  the  centre  of  the  spindle.  One 
revolution  of  crank  moves  the  knee  .1" '. 

The  Stop  Rod  has  sliding  collars,  J  J,  Figure  8,  which  can  be 
readily  set  at  any  desired  point  when  it  is  desired  to  limit  the 
movement  of  the  knee. 

The  Feed  of  table,  of  17",  is  automatic  in  either  direction, 
and  as  it  is  central  can  be  changed  by  a  simple  movement  of  the 
lever  on  front  of  table.  It  can  be  used  running  in  either 
direction,  with  the  table  at  any  angle  to  45°.  The  feed  is  driven 
from  the  feed  cone  through  the  universal  joints  and  telescopic 
shafts  on  the  side  of  the  machine,  page  5,  the  worm  A,  Figure 
2,  and  worm  wheel  B,  through  the  bevel  gears,  and  the  shaft 
D,  the  bevel  gear  at  the  upper  end  of  the  shaft  which  drives  the 
loose  bevel  gears  E  E.  Motion  is  imparted  to  the  table  by  the 
lever  F  and  the  clutch  G. 

An  automatic  stop  is  provided  to  release  the  feed  at  any  point 
when  running  in  either  direction.  The  auxiliary  lever  O,  Figure 
i,  allows  the  feed  to  be  released  by  hand. 

A  handle  is  provided  at  each  end  of  the  table  for  convenient 
operation  by  hand. 

There  are  8  changes  of  feed,  obtained  by  transposing  the  feed 
cone  pulleys,  page  8,  held  in  place  by  knurled  nuts,  giving  a  varia- 
tion of  feeds  from  .004"  to  .073"  to  one  revolution  of  spindle. 
The  lower  cone  pulleys  are  on  an  adjustable  bracket,  which  allows 
the  feed  belt  to  be  easily  tightened. 

Adjustable  Dials  graduated  to  read  to  thousandths  of  an  inch 
indicate  the  longitudinal,  transverse  and  vertical  movements  of 
table,  and  a  series  of  graduations  show  in  degrees  the  angle  to 
the  axis  of  the  spindle  at  which  the  table  is  set.  The  dials  may 
be  adjusted  without  the  aid  of  wrench  or  screw  driver. 

The  Indexing  Head  Stock,  or  the  Spiral  Head  is  to 
divide  the  periphery  of  a  piece  of  work  into  a  number  of  equal 
parts.  Besides  this,  it  is  so  made  that  while  the  table  is  being 
moved  by  the  feed  screw  a  positive  rotary  movement  may  be 
given  to  the  work.  The  velocity  ratios  of  these  movements  are 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


FEED  TABLE  FOR  No.  I  UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINE. 


SPINDLE 
SPEEDS 


68 


110 


178 


305 


TRAVEL  OF  TABLE  IN   INCHES  PER  MINUTE. 


_23 
32 


11 
16 


13 


16 


16 


13 


22 


KROWX    A    SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 


FIG.  1. 


FIG.  2. 


10  BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 

regulated  by  change  gears,  and  any  spiral  provided  for  may  be 
cut  without  interfering  with  the  divisions  of  the  work  obtainable 
from  the  index  plate. 

Figs.  3  and  4,  show  the  construction  of  the  spiral  head.  The 
spiral  spindle,  or  spiral  shell,  is  revolved  by  the  index  crank  J, 
through  a  worm  and  worm  wheel.  The  worm  wheel  has  forty 
teeth  and  consequently  one  turn  of  the  index  crank  or  worm 
shaft  O,  makes  one-fortieth  of  a  revolution  of  the  spiral  spindle, 
and  by  the  use  of  an  index  plate  I,  a  turn  of  the  worm  shaft 
may  be  divided  into  various  definite  parts  and  the  fortieth  of  the 
revolution  of  the  spiral  spindle  correspondingly  sub-divided. 

In  connection  with  the  index  plate  there  is  a  sector  which  is 
used  to  obviate  the  necessity  of  counting  the  number  of  holes 
in  the  plate  when  dividing  the  work.  The  index  crank  pin  P, 
in  the  crank  J,  may  be  used  in  any  circle  of  holes  in  the  index 
plate  by  adjusting  the  crank.  The  index  plate  can  be  kept  from 
turning  by  the  stop  pin  R. 

The  steel  bushings,  shown  in  black  in  the  cuts,  afford  not  only 
an  extended  bearing  for  the  worm  shaft,  but  also  serve  as  a 
pivot  for  the  spindle  box  B.  The  front  end  of  the  spindle  can 
thus  be  raised  and  the  spindle  set  to  any  angle  from  five  degrees 
below  the  horizontal  to  a  perpendicular.  The  angle  is  shown  by 
the  graduations  on  one  side  of  the  spiral  head.  The  spindle 
receives  the  same  arbors  as  the  main  spindle,  and  is  threaded 
for  a  chuck.  When  the  chuck  is  not  in  use  the  thread  is 
protected  by  a  guard  nut. 

Motion  is  transmitted  to  the  spindle  from  the  feed  screw 
through  change  gears  to  two  mitre  gears,  one  of  which  is  shown 
near  T,  Figure  3,  and  the  other  has  upon  its  hub  the  gear  marked 
"worm  gear,"  Figure  5.  By  this  arrangement  the  spindle  can  be 
automatically  rotated  at  whatever  angle  it  may  be  set. 

Tables  are  sent  with  each  machine,  giving  the  change  gears  for 
cutting  sixty-eight  spirals.  The  tables  call  for  the  "  gear  on  worm  " 
the  "  first  gear  on  stud,"  which  means  the  first  gear  placed  on  stud, 
the  "  second  gear  on  stud,"  or  second  gear  placed  on  stud,  and 
the  "gear  on  screw."  The  spiral  head  and  foot  stock  centres 
swing  8"  in  diameter  and  take  14"  in  length. 

The  chuck  sent  with  the  machine  is   provided    with    a    plate 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


II 


12 


BROWN    &    SHAEPE    MFG.    CO. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  13 

which  fits  the  spiral  head  spindle.  A  second  chuck  plate  is  also 
sent  which  fits  the  front  of  main  spindle. 

In  oiling  the  machine  it  is  important  not  to  overlook  the  oil 
holes  L  L  L,  Figure  2.  These  holes  are  reached  from  the  front 
of  the  table,  when  the  table  is  placed  in  the  three  positions  by 
matching  lines  on  the  table  with  a  zero  line  on  the  front  of  the 
saddle. 

Spirals  not  given  in  the  table  may  be  cut  by  using  special 
gears  or  by  determining  by  calculation  many  combinations  of 
the  regular  gears  not  given  in  the  table. 

The  three  index  plates  sent  with  the  machine  have  15,  16,  17, 
18,  19,  20  ;  21,  23,  27,  29,  31,  33,  and  37,  39,  41,  43,  47,  49  holes 
respectively. 

By  means  of  the  raising  block  the  spiral  head  may  be  set  at  any 
angle  on  the  bed. 

The  Vise  swivels  and  has  a  graduated  base,  and  may  be  set 
at  any  angle  on  the  bed.  The  jaws  are  5^"  wide,  i  j£4j"  deep  and 
will  open  2^".  The  jaws  are  made  of  steel  and  left  soft  unless 
otherwise  ordered.  Being  held  by  screws  they  may  be  taken  off 
and  others  designed  for  special  work  put  in  their  places. 

The  Overhead  Works,  Figs.'  6  and  7,  include  a  shipper 
rod,  stops  and  studs  for  attaching  the  lever,  also  hangers  with 
adjustable  self-oiling  boxes. 

The  Counter  Shaft  has  two  14  inch  friction  pulleys  for 
3^  inch  belts,  and  is  usually  run  at  about  no  revolutions  a 
minute. 

Floor  Space  measured  over  the  extreme  projections  and  points 
of  travel  of  the  various  parts,  61x59  inches. 

Weight  of  the  machine  ready  for  shipment  is  about  2040 
pounds. 

Net  Weight,  about  1570  pounds. 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  the  machine  is  packed  are 
49x35x62  inches. 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  change  gears,  index  plates  and 
tables  explaining  the  use  of  same,  6"  3  jawed  chuck,  and  extra 
chuck  plate,  vise,  collet,  centre  rest,  raising  block,  hand  wheel, 
wrenches,  Treatise  on  Milling  Machines,  and  everything  else  shown 
in  cut,  together  with  overhead  works. 


BROWN    &    SHaRPE    MFG.    CO- 


UNIVZtt'SlT 

CAi  ;  f.  ,kH^  - 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


SCORING   WORM   GEAR 


No.    1     Universal    Milling   Machine. 


i6 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


No.  2 

20  1-2  in.  x6  1-2  in.  x  17  1-2  in. 

UNIVERSAL    MILLING   MACHINE. 


The  table  has  an  automatic  longitudinal  feed  of  2o}4",  a  trans- 
verse movement  of  6}4",  and  can  be  lowered  17^"  from  centre 
of  spindle. 

The  centres  swing  10"  in  diameter  and  take  15"  in  length. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  17 

No.  2 

20  1-2  in.  x6  1-2  in.  x  17  1-2  in. 

UNIVERSAL    MILLING   MACHINE. 

Patented  Feb.  5, 1884;  Feb.  14,  1893;  May  23,  1893. 


This  machine  is  well  adapted  for  tool  room  and  tool  making 
purposes,  where  a  more  rigid,  but  not  necessarily  larger  machine 
is  required  than  the  No.  i,  Universal  Milling  Machine,  or  when 
saws  and  cutters  of  a  comparatively  large  diameter  are  to  be  used. 

The  machine  is  the  smallest  of  the  Universal  Milling  Machines 
constructed  with  back  gears,  and  in  the  main  is  similar  to  the 
No.  i.  The  principal  differences,  aside  from  the  necessary 
changes  in  design  b^  the  application  of  back  gears,  are  the  details 
of  the  automatic  feed,  spiral  head  and  foot  stock.  A  perspective 
view  of  the  machine  is  shown  on  page  16  and  a  cross  section  on 
page  1 8. 

The  ^pincti^  has  a  hole  f  J"  in  diameter  its  entire  length  and 
at  the  iront  end  a  No.  10  taper  hole.  The  spindle  is  ground  and 
lapped  and  runs  in  bronze  boxes  that  are  adjustable.  The  front 
box  can  be  tightened  by  the  nut  A,  Fig.  8,  which  brings  the 
shoulder  of  the  collar  against  washers  on  front  of  the  frame.  The 
rear  box  is  adjusted  by  the  nut  C  ;  the  front  end  of  spindle  is 
threaded,  and  is  provided  with  a  guard  nut  D,  which  protects  the 
thread  when  not  in  use. 

The  Cone  has  3  steps,  the  largest  ic"  diameter,  for  3"  belt, 
and  is  back  geared,  giving  6  changes  of  speed.  The  gears  are 
covered. 

„  The  Overhanging  Arm  has  an  adjustable  centre,  and  can  be 
easily  reversed  to  receive  an  attachment,  turned  out  of  the  way, 
or  removed.  The  distance  from  the  centre  of  the  spindle  to  the 
arm  is  5^";  greatest  distance  from  end  of  spindle  to  centre  in 
arm,  14". 

The  Table,  including  oil  pans  and  channels,  is  35^2"  long,  8" 
wide,  has  a  working  surface  32"  x  6^/r,  and  2  T  slots  f£"  wide. 


i8 


BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 


FIG.   8. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 


FIG.  9. 


FIG.  1O. 


20  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

By  means  of  the   shaft  C,  Fig.  9,  it  can  be  moved  transversely 
6/4' ' -     One  revolution  of  the  shaft  moves  the  table  ,2" '. 

The  Saddle,  which  carries  the  table,  pivots  in  the  clamp  bed, 
and  is  rigidly  clamped  to  it  by  three  bolts  which  slide  in  circular 
slots  and  allow  the  table  to  be  set  at  any  angle  to  45  degrees, 
each  way  from  zero.  The  saddle  and  knee  are  clamped  by  fixed 
handles,  thus  dispensing  with  wrenches. 

The  Knee  can  be  moved  so  that  the  top  of  the  table  will  be 
17^ "  from  the  centre  of  spindle  at  its  lowest  point.  One  revo- 
lution of  the  crank  moves  the  table  .\" .  The  knee  rests  on  ball 
bearings  as  shown  at  J,  Fig.  9,  which  allow  it  to  be  easily  moved. 

The  Stop  Rod  has  sliding  collars  J  J,  Fig.  8,  which  can  be 
readily  set  when  it  is  desired  to  limit  the  movement  of  the  knee. 

The  Feed  of  table,  20^",  is  automatic  in  either  direction  and 
can  be  changed  by  a  simple  movement  of  a  lever  on  the  front  of 
the  saddle,  and  as  it  is  driven  from  the  centre  it  can  be  used  with 
table  clamped  at  any  angle,  to  45°,  to  the  axis  of  the  spindle. 
The  feed  is  driven  from  the  feed  cones  through  bevel  gears  by  the 
shaft  A,  Fig.  9,  through  the  bevel  gear  B  to  shaft  carrying  bevel 
gear  P,  then  through  bevel  gear  E  on  lower  end  of  vertical  shaft. 
The  clutch  G  is  operated  by  lever  F.  An  automatic  stop  is  pro- 
vided to  release  the  feed  at  any  point  when  running  in  either 
direction.  The  auxiliary  lever  O  allows  the  feed  to  be  released 
by  hand,  and  as  it  can  only  be  moved  in  one  direction  there  is 
never  any  doubt  as  to  how  to  proceed  in  releasing  feed,  when 
table  is  being  fed  in  either  direction.  The  table  may  be  moved 
by  hand  from  either  end,  as  a  handle  is  provided  at  each  end 
for  this  purpose. 

Twelve  changes  of  feed  may  be  obtained  by  transposing  the 
feed  cone  pulleys  F,  G,  H,  Fig.  8,  held  in  place  by  knurled  nuts, 
giving  a  variation  of  feeds  from  .005"  to  .12"  to  one  revolution  of 
spindle.  For  feed  table  see  page  2 1 . 

Adjustable  Dials,  graduated  to  read  to  thousandths  of  an 
inch,  indicate  the  longitudinal,  transverse  and  vertical  movements 
of  table,  and  a  series  of  graduations  show  in  degrees  the  angle  to 
the  axis  of  the  spindle  at  which  the  table  is  set.  The  dials  may 
be  adjusted  without  the  aid  of  wrench  or  screw  driver. 

The  Spiral  Head  furnished  with  the  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4,  design 
of  1893,  Universal  Milling  Machines,  presents  special  features  in 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


21 


FEED  TABLE  FOR  No.  2  UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINE. 


22  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

that  the  form  admits  of  the  body's  being  clamped  as  solidly  in 
one  position  as  in  another  by  two  bolts  which  are  placed  in 
a  convenient  position  on  the  side,  and  also  that  when  the  spindle 
is  at  an  angle  of  90°  with  the  bed  the  end  of  the  spindle  is 
comparatively  low,  thus  making  it  very  rigid  in  this  position.  In 
doing  many  kinds  of  work,  as  in  cutting  the  flutes  in  reamers,  end 
mills,  etc.,  the  use  of  the  worm  and  worm  wheel  can  be  dispensed 
with,  and  indexing  done  by  revolving  the  spindle  by  hand. 

The  motion  is  transmitted  from  the  feed  screw  through  change 
gears  to  two  spiral  gears.  By  this  arrangement  the  spindle  can 
be  automatically  rotated  at  whatever  angle  it  may  be  set. 

Tables  are  sent  with  each  machine,  giving  the  change  gears  for 
cutting  sixty-eight  spirals.  The  tables  call  for  the  "  gear  on  worm," 
the  "  first  gear  on  stud,"  which  means  the  first  gear  placed  on 
stud,  "the  second  gear  on  stud,"  or  second  gear  placed  on  stud, 
and  the  "gear  on  screw." 

When  it  is  desired  to  rotate  the  spindle  independently  of  the 
worm  and  worm  wheel,  the  worm  A,  Fig.  12,  is  arranged  so  that 
it  may  be  thrown  out  of  gear  with  the  worm  wheel  B,  when  the 
spindle  may  be  turned  by  hand  and  locked  by  the  index  plate  C 
and  pin  D.  An  additional  clamp  is  provided  to  hold  the  spindle, 
so  that  the  strain  will  not  come  on  the  index  pin  and  plate. 

To  throw  the  worm  out  of  gear  :  turn  the  knob  E  (by  means  of 
the  pin  wrench)  about  a  quarter  of  a  revolution  in  the  reverse 
direction  to  that  indicated  by  the  arrow  stamped  on  knob  E ;  this 
will  loosen  nut  G,  which  holds  eccentric  bushing  H  ;  then  with 
the  fingers  turn  at  the  same  time  both  knobs  E  and  F,  and  the 
eccentric  bushing  H  will  be  revolved  and  the  worm  disengaged 
from  the  worm  wheel. 

To  replace  the  worm  :  turn  the  knobs  E  and  F  in  the  direction 
marked  by  the  arrow,  and  tighten  the  knob  E  with  the  pin 
wrench. 

The  Foot-stock,  Fig.  u,  has  an  adjustable  centre;  two  taper 
pins,  one  of  which  is  shown  at  Z,  are  used  to  accurately  locate 
this  centre  in  line  with  the  head-stock  centre.  When  it  is 
desirable  to  set  at  an  angle  out  of  parallel  with  the  base,  as  in 
cutting  taper  reamers,  drills,  etc.,  the  centre  can  be  elevated  or 
depressed  by  means  of  a  rack  and  pinion  actuated  by  the  nut  U. 
The  centre  is  firmly  held  in  any  position  by  the  nuts  W,  X,  and  Y. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 


24  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

The  advantage  of  this  is  easily  appreciated  from  the  fact  that 
the  use  of  centres  that  can  not  be  adjusted  work  is  apt  to  become 
cramped  at  certain  positions  during  its  revolution,  and  as  a  result 
even  spacing  cannot  always  be  obtained. 


FIG.   13. 


To  quickly  adjust  the  foot-stock  centre  in  line  with  the  spiral 
hea'd  centre  a  gauge,  consisting  of  a  bushing  and  a  blade,  Fig.  13, 
can  be  used.  The  bushing  fits  on  a  milling  arbor,  and  the  lower 
edge  of  the  blade  is  the  same  distance  above  the  centre  as  the  top 
of  the  foot-stock  centre.  The  head  stock  centre  is  set  at  the 
desired  angle  and  the  foot-stock  centre  is  set  so  as  to  be  parallel 
with  and  touching  the  edge  of  the  blade.  When  it  is  correctly  set 
the  work  revolves  as  freely  as  though  both  head  and  foot-stock 
centres  were  parallel  with  the  table.  If  it  is  desirable  to  obtain 
angles  greater  than  those  allowed  by  the  foot-stock,  parallels  can 
be  used  under  the  foot-stock. 

The  Frame  is  hollow  and  fitted  as  a  closet  to  hold  the  small 
parts  that  accompany  the  machine.  On  the  left  side  of  the  frame 
there  is  a  pan  for  holding  small  tools,  etc.,  and  on  the  front  of 
this  there  is  a  rack  for  wrenches.  On  the  other  side  of  the  frame 
is  a  shelf  for  holding  the  spiral  head  and  vise  when  they  are  not 
in  use. 

The  Vise  swivels  and  has  a  graduated  base.  The  jaws  are 
5^6"  wide,  \Y%"  deep  and  will  open  2^". 

The  Counter-Shaft  has  2  friction  pulleys  14"  in  diameter  for 
3^£"  belts,  and  should  run  about  180  revolutions  per  minute. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment,  about  2275  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  1750  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  7o"x66". 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  machine  is  shipped,  49"x35"x62". 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  change  gears,  index  plates  and 
tables  explaining  the  use  of  same,  6"  3-jawed  chuck,  and  extra 
chuck  plate,  vise,  collet,  centre  rest,  raising  block,  hand  wheel, 
wrenches,  Treatise  on  Milling  Machines,  and  everything  shown  in 
cut,  together  with  overhead  works. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


25 


MILLING  FACE  OF  UNIVERSAL  MILLING   MACHINE   KNEE. 


2  6  BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

No.  3 

25  in.  x  7  1-2  in.  x  18  1-2  in. 

UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINE. 


The  table  has  an  automatic  longitudinal  feed  of  25",  a  trans- 
verse movement  of  7^",  and  can  be  lowered  18^"  from  centre 

of  spindle. 

The  centres  swing  12"  in  diameter  and  take  21"  in  length. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  27 


No.  3 

25  in.  x  7  1  -2  in.  x  1  8  1  -2  in. 

UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINE 

With  Hand  or  Power  Transverse  and  Vertical  Feeds. 

Patented  Feb.  5, 1884 ;  Feb.  14,  1893 ;  May  23, 1893. 


The  machine  is  similar  in  design  to  the  No.  2  Universal  Milling 
Machines  and  has  the  additional  feature  that  it  can  be  furnished, 
when  desired,  with  Power  Transverse  and  Vertical  Feeds. 

The  Spindle  has  a  hole  fy"  in  diameter  its  entire  length  and 
runs  in  bronze  boxes  provided  with  means  of  compensation  for 
wear.  For  method  of  adjusting  see  page  17.  It  is  ground  and 
lapped.  The  front  end  is  threaded  and  has  a  No.  1 1  taper  hole. 

The  Cone  has  3  steps,  the  largest  u"  diameter,  for  3^2"  belt 
and  is  back  geared,  giving  6  changes  of  speed.  The  gears  are 
covered. 

The  Overhanging  Arm  has  a  bearing  for  outer  end  of  arbor, 
etc.,  as  well  as  an  adjustable  centre.  It  can  be  easily  reversed  to 
receive  an  attachment,  turned  out  of  the  way,  or  removed.  The 
distance  from  the  centre  of  the  spindle  to  the  arm  is  6^/6"  ;  greatest 
distance  from  end  of  spindle  to  centre  in  arm,  18". 

The  Table,  including  oil  pans  and  channels,  is  44^ "  long, 
9^  "wide,  has  a  working  surface  40"  x  8",  2  T  slots  B/8"  wide,  a 
transverse  movement  of  7^>",  and  can  be  lowered  i8>^"  from 
centre  of  spindle. 

The  details  of  the  Power  Transverse  Feed  mechanism,  furnished 
with  this  machine  when  desired,  are  shown  in  Figs.  14  and  15. 
The  clutch  gear  A,  Fig.  14,  revolves  constantly  and  is  driven  by 
the  gear  G,  Fig.  16.  The  transverse  or  cross  feed  is  operated 
by  turning  knob  2,  Figs.  14  and  15  ;  this  operating  the  lever  C 


28 


BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.     CO. 


0 


-_  tr      - 
.«£  4^x 


^l||_BJSs££H 


FIG.     15. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  29 

throws  the  clutch  I)  into  mesh  with  the  clutch  gear  A,  Fig.  14. 
The  movable  stop  E  can  be  set  to  release  the  feed  automatically 
at  any  desired  point. 

The  Saddle,  which  carries  the  table,  pivots  in  the  clamp  bed, 
and  is  rigidly  clamped  to  it  by  three  bolts  which  slide  in  circular 
slots  and  allow  the  table  to  be  set  at  any  angle  to  45  degrees, 
each  way  from  zero.  The  saddle  and  knee  are  clamped  by  fixed 
handles,  thus  dispensing  with  wrenches. 

The  Knee  can  be  lowered  i&y£"  from  centre  of  spindle,  and 
has  a  stop  rod  with  sliding  collars  which  may  be  quickly  set  at 
any  desired  point.  The  details  of  the  Power  Vertical  Feed, 
furnished  on  this  machine  when  desired,  are  shown  in  Fig.  16. 
The  vertical  feed  is  driven  from  the  feed  cone  pulleys  through  the 
shaft  A,  and  bevel  gears  B  B.  The  direction  of  the  feed  is 
determined  by  clutch  C,  which  can  be  changed  by  loosening  a 
knurled  nut  on  the  side  of  the  box  protecting  the  gears  and  clutch, 
and  moving  the  clutch  up  or  down  and  again  tightening  the  nut. 
The  driving  shaft  D  transfers  the  power  through  the  bevel  gears 
E  E  to  shaft  F,  carrying  the  spur  gear  G,  meshing  into  the  gear 
at  the  side  of  the  clutch  H  ;  to  throw  the  feed  in  the  knob  I  is 
drawn  out,  which  engages  the  clutch  H  with  the  continuously 
running  spur  gears,  thus  driving  the  bevel  gears  K  K,  which 
drive  the  screw  L.  The  feed  can  be  released  instantly  by  the 
handle  J,  or  the  trip  lever  M,  which  is  actuated  by  the  dogs,  at  the 
end  of  the  sliding  key  N.  The  stops  O  O  can  be  set  at  any 
desired  point,  relatively  to  the  lug  P,  to  determine  the  position  at 
which  it  is  desired  to  release  this  feed. 

The  Feed  of  table,  25",  is  automatic  in  either  direction,  and 
can  be  changed  by  a  simple  movement  of  a  lever  on  the  front  of 
the  saddle,  and  as  it  is  driven  from  the  centre  it  can  be  used  with 
table  clamped  at  any  angle,  to  45°,  to  the  axis  of  the  spindle. 
There  are  16  changes  of  feed  obtained  by  transposing  the  feed 
cone  pulleys,  held  in  place  by  knurled  nuts,  page  31,  varying  from 
.003"  to  .302"  to  one  revolution  of  the  spindle.  The  table  may 
be  moved  by  hand  from  either  end,  as  at  each  end  a  handle  is 
provided  for  this  purpose. 

Adjustable  Dials,  graduated  to  read  to  thousandths  of  an 
inch,  indicate  the  longitudinal,  transverse  and  vertical  movements 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


FEED  TABLE  FOR  NO.  3  UNIVERSAL  MILLING   MACHINE. 


003. 005. 008 .012. 016 .018. 024. 028. 036. 041. 057. 062 .087. 129. 193. 30$ 


TRAVEL  OF  TABLE 


32  BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

of  table,  and  a  series  of  graduations  show  in  degrees  the  angle  to 
the  axis  of  the  spindle  at  which  the  table  is  set.  The  dials  may 
be  adjusted  without  the  aid  of  wrench  or  screw-driver. 

The  Spiral  Head  has  indexing  mechanism  by  which  the 
periphery  of  a  piece  of  work  may  be  divided  into  equal  parts,  and 
the  velocity  of  the  rotary  motion  of  its  spindle,  01  of  the  work, 
relative  to  the  speed  of  the  feed  screw,  is  regulated  by  change 
gears  at  the  end  of  the  table.  Any  spiral,  of  the  68  provided  for, 
may  be  cut  without  interfering  with  the  divisions  obtainable  from 
the  index  plates  sent  with  the  machine.  A  plate  for  rapid  index- 
ing of  work  into  24  or  less  divisions  is  placed  directly  on  the 
spindle,  and  the  worm  which  turns  the  spindle  may  be  thrown 
quickly  out  of  gear  by  a  knurled  knob  on  the  back  of  the  spiral 
head  to  allow  for  this  direct  or  plain  indexing.  The  spindle  of 
the  spiral  head  may  be  moved  continuously,  or  through  any 
required  portion  of  a  revolution.  The  spiral  head  may  be  set  at 
any  angle  on  the  table  by  use  of  the  raising  block.  The  front 
end  of  the  spindle  has  a  No.  1 1  taper  hole  and  is  threaded. 

The  head  can  be  set  and  rigidly  clamped,  at  any  angle  between 
.TO  degrees  below  the  horizontal  and  10  degrees  beyond  the 
perpendicular.  The  side  of  the  spiral  head  is  graduated  in  degrees 
to  show  the  angle  of  the  elevation  of  the  spindle.  The  Spiral 
Head  and  Foot-Stock  Centres  swing  12"  in  diameter,  and  take 
21 "  in  length. 

The  Foot-Stock  spindle  may  be  raised  vertically,  and  set  at  an 
angle  in  a  vertical  plane.  By  this  arrangement  the  spiral  head 
and  foot-stock  spindles  may,  in  ordinary  use,  be  kept  in  line 
when  the  front  of  the  spiral  head  spindle  has  been  elevated  or 
depressed. 

For  detailed  description,  sketch  and  method  of  using  spiral 
head  and  foot-stock  see  pages  20  to  24. 

The  Frame  is  hollow,  and  fitted  as  a  closet  to  hold  the  small 
parts  that  accompany  the  machine.  On  the  left  side  of  the  frame 
there  is  a  pan  for  holding  small  tools,  etc.,  and  on  the  front  of 
this  there  is  a  rack  for  wrenches.  On  the  other  side  of  the  frame 
is  a  shelf  for  holding  the  spiral  head  and  vise  when  they  are  not 
in  use. 

The  Vise  swivels  and  has  a  graduated  base.  The,  jaws  are 
6y&"  wide,  iTy  deep,  and  will  open  3^". 


BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


33 


The  Counter-Shaft  has  friction  pulleys  16"  in  diameter  for  4" 
belts,  and  should  run  about  175  revolutions  per  minute. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment,  about  3575  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  2800  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  84"x75". 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  machine  is  shipped,  59'^  40"  x  67". 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  change  gears,  index  plates,  and 
tables  explaining  the  use  of  same,  8"  3-] awed  chuck,  and  extra 
chuck  plate,  vise,  collet,  centre  rest,  raising  block,  hand  wheel, 
wrenches,  Treatise  on  Milling  Machines,  and  everything  shown  in 
cut,  together  with  overhead  works. 


34  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

No.  4 

28  1-2  in.  x8  1-2  in.  x  19  in. 

UNIVERSAL   MILLING    MACHINE. 

DESIGN   OF    1893 


The  table  has  an  automatic  longitudinal  feed  of  28^",  a  trans- 
verse movement  of  8%",  and  can  be  lowered  19"  from  centre  of 
spindle. 

The  centres  swing  14"  in  diameter  and  take  26"  in  length. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  35 


No.  4 

28  1-2  in.  x  8  1-2  in.  x  19  in. 

UNIVERSAL   MILLING  MACHINE 

With  Hand  or  Power  Transverse  and  Vertical  Feeds. 
DESIGN  OF   1893. 

Patented  Feb.  5,  1884 ;  Feb.  14,  1893 ;  May  23,  1893. 


This  machine,  while  in  its  general  construction  is  similar  to  the 
preceding  machine  described,  is  heavier.  It  is  well  adapted  for 
use  in  shops  where  machine  construction  demands  a  Universal 
Milling  Machine  'of  this  capacity. 

The  Spindle  has  a  hole  %"  in  diameter  its  entire  length  and 
runs  in  bronze  boxes  provided  with  means  of  compensation  for 
wear.  For  method  of  adjusting  seepage  17.  It  is  ground  and 
lapped.  The  front  end  is  threaded  and  has  a  No.  1 1  taper  hole. 

The  Cone  has  3  steps,  the  largest  13"  in  diameter,  for  3^"  belt 
and  is  back  geared,  giving  6  changes  of  speed.  The  gears  are 
covered. 

The  Overhanging  Arm  has  a  bearing  for  outer  end  of  arbor, 
etc.,  as  well  as  an  adjustable  centre.  It  can  be  easily  reversed  to 
receive  an  attachment,  turned  out  of  the  way,  or  removed.  The 
distance  from  the  centre  of  the  spindle  to  the  arm  is  7  %  " ;  great- 
est distance  from  end  of  spindle  to  centre  in  arm,  24". 

The  Table,  including  oil  pans  and  channels,  is  53/^"  long, 
\\Y%"  wide,  has  a  working  surface  48"  x  9^",  2  T  slots  Y^'f  wide, 
a  transverse  movement  of  8^/2"  and  can  be  lowered  19"  from 
centre  of  spindle. 

The  details  of  the  Power  Transverse  Feed  mechanism,  furnished 
with  this  machine  when  desired,  are  similar  to  those  on  the  No.  3 
Universal  Milling  Machine  described  on  page  27. 


36  BROWN    &.    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

The  Saddle,  which  carries  the  table,  pivots  in  the  clamp  bed 
and  is  rigidly  clamped  to  it  by  three  bolts  which  slide  in  circular 
slots  and  allow  the  table  to  be  set  at  any  angle  to  45  degrees, 
each  way  from  zero.  The  saddle  and  knee  are  clamped  by  fixed 
handles,  thus  dispensing  with  wrenches. 

The  Knee  can  be  lowered  vertically  19"  from  centre  of  spindle, 
and  has  a  stop  rod  with  sliding  collars  which  may  be  quickly  set 
at  any  desired  point. 

The  details  of  the  Power  Vertical  Feed  mechanism,  furnished 
with  this  machine  when  desired,  are  similar  to  those  on  the  No.  3 
Universal  Milling  Machine  described  on  page  29. 

The  Feed  of  table,  28^",  is  automatic  in  either  direction  and 
can  be  changed  by  a  simple  movement  of  a  lever  on  the  front  of 
the  saddle,  and  as  it  is  driven  from  the  centre  it  can  be  used  with 
table  clamped  at  any  angle,  to  45°,  to  the  axis  of  the  spindle. 
There  are  1 2  changes  of  feed,  obtained  by  transposing  the  feed 
cone  pulleys,  held  in  place  by  knurled  knobs,  page  37,  varying 
from  .004"  to  .2 1 4"  to  one  revolution  of  spindle.  A  handle  is 
provided  at  each  end  of  the  table  for  convenient  operation  by  hand. 

Adjustable  Dials  graduated  to  read  to  thousandths  of  an  inch 
indicate  the  longitudinal,  transverse  and  vertical  movements  of 
table,  and  a  series  of  graduations  show  in  degrees  the  angle  to 
the  axis  of  the  spindle  at  which  the  table  is  set.  The  dials  may 
be  adjusted  without  the  aid  of  wrench  or  screw-driver. 

The  Spiral  Head  has  indexing  mechanism  by  which  the 
periphery  of  a  piece  of  work  may  be  divided  into  equal  parts,  and 
the  velocity  of  the  rotary  motion  of  its  spindle,  or  of  the  work, 
relative  to  the  speed  of  the  feed  screw,  is  regulated  by  change 
gears  at  the  end  of  the  table.  Any  spiral  of  the  68  provided  for 
may  be  cut  without  interfering  with  the  divisions  obtainable  from 
the  index  plates  sent  with  the  machine.  A  plate  for  rapid  index- 
ing of  work  into  24  or  less  divisions  is  placed  directly  on  the 
spindle,  and  the  worm  which  turns  the  spindle  may  be  thrown 
quickly  out  of  gear  by  a  knurled  knob  on  the  back  of  the  spiral 
head  to  allow  for  this  direct  or  plain  indexing.  The  spindle  of 
the  spiral  head  may  be  moved  continuously,  or  through  any 
required  portion  of  a  revolution.  The  spiral  head  may  be  set  at 
any  angle  on  the  table  by  use  of  the  raising  block.  The  front 
end  of  spindle  has  a  No.  1 1  taper  hole  and  is  threaded. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


37 


FEED  TABLE  FOR  NO.  4  UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINE. 
DESIGN  OF  1893. 


SPIN. 


STUD 


FEED 
SHAFT 


FEED  PER. 
REV.  OF 
SPINDLE 


004    .006    .010    .016   .024    .025    .036    .037    .058    .090    .144    .214 


TRAVEL  OF  TABLE  IN  INCHES  PER  MINUTE 


i~n7 

32 


14 


18 


16 


16 


4 


23 


32 


32 


30 


4 


16 


39 


32 


3  — 


50 


4 


10 


112 


16 


10 


24 


144 


13 


20  f 


30  f 


186 


4 


10 


16 


26  f 


39 


240 
310 
400 


31 
32 

ML 

il- 


8 


4 


10 


"I 


13 


is 

23  1 


£t 

28 
36 


66  2 

85  i 


38  BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

The  head  can  be  set  at  any  angle  between  10  degrees  below  the 
horizontal  and  10  degrees  beyond  the  perpendicular,  and  rigidly 
clamped  at  any  point.  The  side  of  the  spiral  head  is  graduated 
in  degrees  to  show  the  angle  of  the  elevation  of  the  spindle.  The 
Spiral  Head  and  Foot-Stock  Centres  swing  14"  in  diameter  and 
take  26"  in  length. 

The  Foot-Stock  spindle  may  be  raised  vertically  and  set  at  an 
angle  in  a  vertical  plane.  By  this  arrangement  the  spiral  head 
and  foot-stock  spindles  may,  in  ordinary  use,  be  kept  in  line  when 
the  front  of  the  spiral  head  spindle  has  been  elevated  or 
depressed. 

For  detailed  description,  sketch  and  method  of  using  the  spiral 
head  and  foot-stock  see  pages  20  to  24. 

The  Frame  is  hollow  and  fitted  as  a  closet  to  hold  the  small 
parts  that  accompany  the  machine.  On  the  left  side  of  the  frame 
there  is  a  pan  for  holding  small  tools,  etc.,  and  on  the  front  of 
this  there  is  a  rack  for  wrenches.  On  the  other  side  of  the  frame 
is  a  shelf  for  holding  the  spiral  head  and  vise  when  they  are  not 
in  use. 

The  Vise  swivels  and  has  a  graduated  base.  The  jaws  are 
6>4j"  wide,  iTV  deep  and  will  open  3^". 

The  Counter-Shaft  has  tight  and  loose  pulleys  16"  in  diameter 
for  4"  belts,  and  should  run  about  175  revolutions  per  minute. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment,  about  4950  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  4150  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  98"  x  87". 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  machine  is  shipped,  67"  x  46"  x  70". 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  change  gears,  index  plates  and 
tables  explaining  the  use  of  same,  9"  3-jawed  chuck  and  extra 
chuck  plate,  vise,  collet,  centre  rest,  raising  block,  hand  wheel, 
wrenches,  Treatise  on  Milling  Machines,  and  everything  shown  in 
cut,  together  with  overhead  works. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.     CO. 


39 


UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINE  IN  OPERATION. 


4o 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


No.  4  Universal  Milling  Machine. 

(No.  3,  Prior  to  1893.) 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  41 


No.  4 

22  in.  x  6  3-8  in.  x  21   in. 

UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINE. 

(No.  3,  Prior  to  1893.) 


This  machine  is  similar  in  its  general  design  to  the  No.  i 
Universal  Milling  Machine  made  prior  to  1895,  but  is  heavier  and 
back  geared. 

The  Spindle  runs  in  bronze  boxes  and  can  be  adjusted  to  com- 
pensate for  wear  by  tightening  the  nuts  C  and  V,  Fig.  17.  The 
end  thrust  of  the  spindle  is  taken  by  a  washer  as  shown  at  N. 
The  front  end  has  a  '*No.  1 1  taper  hole. 

The  Cone  has  3  steps  for  ^A"  belt  and  is  back  geared,  the 
back  gears  are  placed  beneath  the  cone  and  may  be  taken  out 
by  unscrewing  the  screw  G,  taking  off  the  lever  and  taking  out 
the  screw  M  ;  the  lever  is  then  put  back  and  the  eccentric  shaft 
with  the  bushing  pulled  out. 

The  Overhanging  Arm  has  a  movable  arbor  support  with  an 
adjustable  centre.  Distance  from  centre  of  spindle  to  arm,  4". 

The  Table  is  40"  long  and  7"  wide,  has  a  T  slot  y±"  wide,  a 
transverse  movement  of  6 24",  and  can  be  lowered  21  "from  centre 
of  spindle.  It  can  be  set  at  any  angle  to  45  degrees. 

The  Feed  of  table,  of  22",  is  automatic  in  either  direction. 
There  are  6  changes  of  feed  varying  from  .004"  to  .05"  to  one 
revolution  of  spindle. 

Adjustable  Dials,  graduated  to  read  to  thousandths  of  an  inch, 
indicate  the  transverse  and  vertical  movements  of  table. 

The  Spiral  Head  and  Foot-Stock  Centres,  similar  in  design  to 
those  described  on  page  7,  swing  n^"  m  diameter  and  take 
22^"  in  length.  The  head  can  be  set  at  any  angle  from  5 
degrees  below  the  horizontal  to  the  perpendicular.  The  front  end 


BROWN   &   SHARPE   MFG.  CO. 


FIG.  17. 


FROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  43 

of  spindle  is  threaded  and  has  a  No.  1 1  taper  hole.  The  straight 
hole  through  spindle,  at  end  of  taper,  is  i^"  in  diameter.  The 
head  can  be  set  at  any  angle  on  table  by  means  of  the  raising 
block. 

The  Vise  swivels  and  has  a  graduated  base.  The  jaws  are 
&/%"  wide,  ijV'  deep  and  will  open  3^/8//. 

The  Counter-Shaft  has  2  friction  pulleys  16"  in  diameter  for 
4"  belts  and  should  run  about  105  revolutions  per  minute. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment,  about  3900  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  3165  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  74"  xsy". 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  machine  is  shipped,  63"  x  40"  x  7 i". 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  change  gears,  index  plates,  and 
tables  explaining  use  of  same,  9"  3-jawed  chuck,  vise,  collet, 
centre  rest,  raising  block,  hand  wheel,  wrenches,  Treatise  on 
Milling  Machines,  and  everything  shown  in  cut,  together  with 
overhead  works. 


44 


BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


MILLING  ELECTRIC  MOTOR  GEARS  ON  A  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  45 

PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINES. 


The  majority  of  milling  is  plain  milling.  Cutting  spirals,  or 
work  that  is  milled  when  the  table  is  at  an  angle,  other  than  a 
right  angle,  with  the  spindle,  form  a  comparatively  small  part  of 
the  work  done  even  on  Universal  Milling  Machines.  Where  a 
shop  can  have  but  one  machine,  without  doubt  it  should  be  a 
Universal,  for  then  the  workman  is  prepared  for  any  operation 
that  may  be  required.  When  a  second  machine,  however,  is  to 
be  purchased  the  advantages  of  obtaining  a  plain  milling  machine 
should  be  considered.  The  plain  machines  are  more  simple  and 
consequently  comparatively  low  priced,  and  as  the  table  is  not 
swiveled  it  can  rest  directly  upon  the  knee  or  other  support, 
rendering  the  machine  stiffer  and  enabling  a  heavier  cut  to  be 
taken  and  frequently  more  work  produced  in  any  given  time. 

To  operate  a  Plain  Machine  requires  so  little  attention,  com- 
paratively, that  frequently  the  man  who  runs  it  can  also  run  a 
Universal  Machine.  On  many  classes  of  work  boys  can  be 
employed,  and  in  a  number  of  cases  one  boy  can  operate  as  many 
as  four  machines.  As  the  advantage  of  plain  milling  is  more 
adequately  appreciated  the  number  of  machines  in  use  is  rapidly 
increasing.  At  one  time  it  was  thought  that  only  irregular  shaped 
or  small  pieces  could  be  milled  advantageously,  but  it  is  now  quite 
well  known  that  very  many  plain  surfaces  and  large  pieces  can  be 
milled  more  profitably  than  they  can  be  planed.  The  cutter 
moving  constantly  through  the  work  will  accomplish  more  than 
the  planing  tool  with  its  intermittent  action.  It  is  also  now  more 
fully  appreciated  than  formerly,  that  usually  cutters  can  be  made 
quite  cheaply,  and  with  care  will  last  a  long  time,  also  that  in 
manufacturing,  even  though  the  special  cutters  and  fixtures  are 
comparatively  expensive,  the  saving  in  time  and  the  superior 
accuracy  of  the  work  make  their  use  profitable. 

For  a  number  of  years  we  have  used  and  built  Plain  Milling 
Machines,  and  they  have  formed  parts  of  the  exhibits  which  have 
been  honored  by  the  juries  of  award  in  the  various  world 
expositions  during  the  past  twenty-five  years. 


DIMENSIONS  OF  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINES. 


NO.  OF  MACHINE. 

0                1                2345 

No.  Prior  to  1893. 

4 

6 

8 

No.  of  Taper  Hole 

in  'Spindle. 

9 

10 

10 

.     11 

11 

12 

Distance     from 

Centre  of  Spin- 

dle   to    O.    H. 

5  1-8" 

5  1-2" 

5-1-2" 

63-8" 

71-4" 

81-8" 

Arm. 

Greatest    Dis- 

tance from  End 

of    Spindle    to 

Centre  in  O.  H. 

Arm. 

10  1-2" 

16" 

16" 

21" 

261-2" 

24" 

Back  Geared. 

No 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Working  Surface 
of  Table. 

20"x6" 

32"  x 

71-2" 

34"  xlO" 

42'  x!2 

48;'xl4" 

->4"xl6" 

Transverse 

Movement      of 

Table. 

4  1-4" 

6  1-2" 

6  1-2" 

7" 

8  1-4" 

93-4" 

Transverse 

Movement     o  f 

Table    fitted 

with  Oil  Pump. 

6" 

7  1-8" 

81-4" 

Greatest  Dis- 

tance    from 

Centre  of  Spin- 

dle to   Top  of 

Table. 

15" 

181-2" 

18  1-2" 

193-4" 

22" 

19  1-2" 

Length  of  Auto- 

matic Feed. 

16" 

24" 

28" 

34" 

42" 

48" 

No.   of    Changes 

- 

of  Feed. 

8 

8 

12 

16 

12 

8 

Variations  in 

Feed     to     one 

.005"  to 

.007"  to 

.006"  to 

.004"  to 

.005"  to 

023"  to 

rev.  of  Spindle 

.107" 

.118" 

.133" 

.332" 

.236" 

.25" 

Net  Weight. 

850  Ibs. 

1550  Ibs. 

1750  Ibs. 

2750  Ibs. 

3590  Ibs. 

5200  Ibs. 

Floor  Space. 

49"x36" 

69"  x46  ' 

68"x45" 

84"x5l' 

102"x 
59" 

115"x 
69" 

DIMENSIONS  OF  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINES. 


NO.  OF  MACHINE. 

12 

13 

23 

24 

No.  prior  to  1893. 

2 

3 

5 

7 

No.  of  Taper  Hole 
in'  Spindle. 

10 

10 

11 

12 

Distance  from  Cen- 

tre of  Spindle  to 
0.  H.  Arm. 

33-16" 

27-8" 

5  1-2" 

5  9-16" 

Greatest    Distance 

from  End  of  Spin- 
dle to  Centre  in 

O.  H.  Arm. 

93-4" 

11" 

15" 

18" 

Working  Surface  of 
Table. 

19"x6" 

27"  x8" 

50  5-8"  x  10" 

60"xl4  1-2" 

Transverse     Move- 

ment of  Table. 

3" 

9" 

12" 

Greatest    Distance 

from    Centre     of^ 
Spindle  to  Top  of' 
Table. 

7  1-2" 

63-8" 

19" 

17  5-8" 

Length     of    Auto- 
matic Feed. 

17  1-2" 

15" 

49" 

60" 

No.  of  Changes  of 
Feed. 

3 

3 

Variations  in  Feed 

to    one     rev.    of 
Spindle. 

.014"  to  .05 

.015"  to  .04" 

Oto  .10" 

Oto  .08" 

Net  Weight. 

1600  Ibs. 

2240  Ibs. 

2600  Ibs. 

3700  Ibs. 

Floor  Space. 

46"x45" 

47"  x  47" 

45-  x  110" 

52"  x  129" 

48 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


No.   0 

16  in.  x  4  1-4  in.  x  15  in. 

PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE. 


The  table  has  an  automatic  longitudinal  feed  of  16",  a  trans- 
verse movement  of  4^",  and  can  be  lowered  15"  from  centre  of 
spindle. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  49 


No.   O 

16  in.  x  4  1-4  in.  x  15  in. 

PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE 

With  Rack  or  Screw  Feed. 

Screw  Feed  Machine  Patented  May  23,  1893. 


The  Cut  Illustrates  the  Rack  Feed  Machine. 

This  machine  is  made  with  either  Screw  or  Rack  Feed,  and 
accordingly  has  special  advantages  for  tool  work  or  for  manu- 
facturing purposes.  With  Screw  Feed  the  machine  is  more  con- 
venient for  a  tool  maker  or  other  operator  who  wishes  to  work 
exactly  to  a  line.  The  table  can  be  fed  by  hand  to  a  given  point 
with  steadiness  and  certainty.  It  is  always  under  absolute  con- 
trol and  is  practically  locked  when  the  feed  is  disengaged. 

For  manufacturing  purposes,  on  the  other  hand,  the  machine 
with  Rack  Feed  is  superior,  as  the  position  of  the  table  may  be 
much  more  readily  and  rapidly  changed  by  hand,  and  con- 
sequently time  can  be  saved  in  various  ways,  notably,  in  moving 
the  table  for  taking  work  out  and  placing  it  in  position  for  the 
cut.  In  manufacturing,  the  power  feed  is  used  and  the  movement 
of  the  table  is  steady  and  uniform. 

The  Spindle  has  a  hole  -|f  "  in  diameter  its  entire  length,  and 
runs  in  bronze  boxes  provided  with  means  of  compensation  for 
wear.  For  method  of  adjusting  see  page  17.  The  front  end  is 
threaded  and  has  a  No.  9  taper  hole. 

The  Cone  has  4  steps,  the  largest  10"  diameter,  for  2%"  belt. 

The  Overhanging  Arm  can  be  easily  reversed  to  receive  an 
attachment,  turned  out  of  the  way,  or  removed.  The  distance 
from  the  centre  of  the  spindle  to  the  arm  is  5>^";  greatest 
distance  from  end  of  spindle  to  centre  in  arm,  io*4"> 


5° 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


FEED  TABLE  FOR  No.  0  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE. 
RACK  OR  SCREW   FEED. 


SPI'NDLE 
SPEEDS 


TRAVEL  OF  TABLE  IN  INCHES  PER  MINUTE. 


90 


_ 

!6 


« 
6 16 


225 


10 


360 


13 


4 


lof 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  51 

The  Table,  including  oil  pans  and  channels,  is  27"  long,  8" 
wide,  has  a  working  surface  2o"x6",  3  T  slots  yz"  wide,  a  trans- 
verse movement  of  4^",  and  can  be  lowered  15"  from  centre  of 
spindle. 

The  Feed  of  table,  16",  is  automatic  in  either  direction,  and 
there  are  8  changes  of  feed,  obtained  by  transposing  the  feed 
pulleys,  page  50,  held  in  place  by  knurled  nuts,  varying  from 
.005"  to,.  107"  to  one  revolution  of  spindle.  The  cone  pulley 
bracket  is  adjustable,  which  allows  the  feed  belt  to  be  tightened. 

Adjustable  Dials,  graduated  to  read  to  thousandths  of  an 
inch,  indicate  the  transverse  and  vertical  movements  of  table, 
and  these  dials  may  be  adjusted  without  the  aid  of  wrench  or 
screw-driver. 

The  Frame  is  hollow  and  fitted  as  a  closet  to  hold  the  small 
parts  that  accompany  the  machine.  On  the  left  side  of  the  frame 
there  is  a  pan  for  holding  small  tools,  etc.,  and  on  the  front  of 
this  there  is  a  rack  for  wrenches. 

The  Vise,  with  Rack  Feed  Machine,  is.  flanged  and  has  jaws 
4^"  wide,  if"  deep  and  will  open  2". 

The  Vise  with  Screw  Feed  Machine  swivels,  and  has  a  grad- 
uated base.  The  jaws  are  5^"  wide,  i-J"  deep  and  will 
open  2  34  ". 

The  Counter-Shaft  has  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  12 "in  diam- 
eter, for  2*^"  belts,  and  should  run  about  180  revolutions  per 
minute. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment,  about  1150  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  850  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  5o"x36". 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  machine  is  shipped,  39"  x  30"  x  59*^. 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  vise,  oil  can,  collet,  wrenches, 
Treatise  on  Milling  Machines,  and  everything  shown  in  cut, 
together  with  overhead  works. 


52 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

No.  1 

24  in.  x  6  1-2  in.  x  18  1-2  in. 

PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE 

(No.  4,  Prior  to  1893.) 


The  table  has  an  automatic  longitudinal  feed  of  24",  a  trans- 
verse movement  of  6^",  and  can  be  lowered  iSl/>"  from  centre 
of  spindle. 


1-0  JVr,] 
BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  53 


No.  1 

24  in.  x  6  1  -2  in.  x  1  8  1-2  in. 

PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE. 

(No.  4,  Prior  to  1893.) 
With  Rack  or  Screw  Feed. 

Screw  Feed  Machine  Patented  May  23,  1893. 


The  Cut  Illustrates  the  Screw  Feed  Machine. 

This  machine,  when  fitted  with  screw  feed,  is  well  adapted  for 
tool  room  and  jobbing  use  and  when  fitted  with  rack  feed  is  well 
adapted  for  manufacturing  purposes,  as  the  table  can  be  quickly 
handled  for  putting  on  and  taking  off  work. 

This  machine  will  do  heavier  work  than  the  universal  machine 
of  the  same  size,  as  the  table  rests  directly  upon  the  knee  and  the 
arm  supports  steady  the  cutter  arbor. 

The  Spindle  has  a  hole  f  ^"  in  diameter  its  entire  length,  and 
runs  in  bronze  boxes  provided  with  means  of  compensation  for 
wear.  For  method  of  adjusting  see  page  17.  The  front  end  is 
threaded,  and  has  a  No.  10  taper  hole. 

The  Cone  has  4  steps,  the  largest  io%"  diameter,  for  3"  belt. 

The  Overhanging  Arm  has  a  hole  for  a  centre  or  for  a  bear- 
ing for  outer  end  of  arbor,  etc.  It  can  be  easily  reversed  to 
receive  an  attachment,  turned  out  of  the  way,  or  removed.  The 
distance  from  the  centre  of  the  spindle  to  the  arm  is  5  y2  " ;  great- 
est distance  from  end  of  spindle  to  centre  in  arm,  16".  An  arm 
support  is  furnished  and  with  this  in  position  milling  can  be 
done  to  13^"  from  face  of  column. 

The  Table,  including  oil  pans  and  channels,  is  38"  long,  10" 
wide,  has  a  working  surface  32^x7^",  3  T  slots  ffi'  wide,  a 


54 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


FEED  TABLE  FOR  No.  I    PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE. 
SCREW  FEED. 


SPINDLE 
SPEEDS 


TRAVEL  OF  TABLE  IN   INCHES  PER  MINUTE. 


68 


Jl 
33 


11 


64 


110 


.9. 
16 


93- 
y4 


178 


306 


.15. 
b!6 


iof 


oil 

3  16 


7.15 
7  16 


15l 


27l 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


FEED  TABLE  FOR  No.  1   PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE 
RACK  FEED. 


SPINDLE 
SPEEDS 


68 


110 


178 


306 


J5. 
32 


25 
32 


TRAVEL  OF  TABLE  IN   INCHES  PER  MINUTE. 


•it! 


is! 


10' 


23 


13 


21 


36 


56  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

transverse  movement  of  6^",  and  can  be  lowered  18^"  from 
centre  of  spindle. 

The  Feed  of  table,  24",  is  automatic  in  either  direction,  and 
there  are  8  changes  of  feed,  obtained  by  transposing  the  feed 
pulleys,  pages  54  and  55,  held  in  place  by  knurled  nuts,  varying 
from  .007"  to  .118"  in  the  rack  feed  machine  and  from  .005"  to 
.089"  in  the  screw  feed  machine,  to  one  revolution  of  spindle. 

Adjustable  Dials,  graduated  to  read  to  thousandths  of  an 
inch,  indicate  the  transverse  and  vertical  movements  of  table, 
and  these  dials  may  be  adjusted  without  the  aid  of  wrrench  or 
screw-driver. 

The  Frame  is  hollow  and  fitted  as  a  closet  to  hold  the  small 
parts  that  accompany  the  machine.  On  the  left  side  there  is  a 
pan  for  holding  small  tools,  etc.,  and  on  the  front  of  this  there  is  a 
rack  for  wrenches. 

The  Vise,  with  Rack  Feed  Machine,  is  flanged  and  has  jaws 
5-5-"  wide,  i^j"  deep  and  opens  2^". 

The  Vise,  with  Screw  Feed  Machine,  swivels  and  has  a  grad- 
uated base.  The  jaws  are  5^"  wide,  i^g"  deep,  and  will 
open  2^4". 

The  Counter-Shaft  has  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  14"  in  diam- 
eter, for  3^2"  belts,  and  should  run  about  no  revolutions  per 
minute. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment,  about  2025  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  1550  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  7o"x45". 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  machine  is  shipped,  46"x59"x33ff. 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  vise,  oil  can,  collet,  wrenches, 
Treatise  on  Milling  Machines,  and  everything  shown  in  cut, 
together  with  overhead  works. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 


57 


MILLING  FACE  AND  SIDES  AT  ONE  CUT, 


58  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

No.  2 

28  in.  x  6  1  -2  in.  x  1  8  1  -2  in. 

PLAIN   MILLING  MACHINE, 

With  Rack  or  Screw  Feed. 


The  table  has  an  automatic  longitudinal  feed  of  28",  a  trans- 
verse movement  of  6^/r,  and  can  be  lowered  i8^"from  centre 
of  spindle. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  59 


No.  2 

28  in.  x  6  1  -2  in.  x  1  8  1  -2  in. 

PLAIN   MILLING  MACHINE, 

WITH  RACK  OR  SCREW  FEED. 

Screw  Feed  Machine  Patented  May  23,  1893. 


The  Cut  Illustrates  the  Screw  Feed  Machine. 

The  Spindle  has  a  hole  f  J"  in  diameter  its  entire  length,  and 
runs  in  bronze  boxes  provided  with  means  of  compensation  for 
wear.  For  method  of  adjusting  see  page  17.  The  front  end  is 
threaded,  and  has  a  No.  10  taper  hole. 

The  Cone  has  3  steps,  the  largest  10"  diameter,  for  3"  belt, 
and  is  back  geared,  giving  six  changes  of  speed.  The  gears  are 
covered. 

The  Overhanging  Arm  has  a  hole  for  a  centre,  or  for  a  bear- 
ing for  outer  end  of  arbor,  etc.  It  can  be  easily  reversed  to 
receive  an  attachment,  turned  out  of  the  way,  or  removed.  The 
distance  from  the  centre  of  the  spindle  to  the  arm  is  5  y2  " ;  great- 
est distance  from  end  of  spindle  to  centre  in  arm,  is  16".  An  arm 
support  is  furnished  and  with  this  in  position  milling  can  be 
done  to  13^2"  from  face  of  column. 

The  Table,  including  oil  pans  and  channels,  is  40"  long,  41^." 
on  screw  feed  machine,  10"  wide,  has  a  working  surface  34" x  10", 
3  T  slots,  $/$"  wide,  a  transverse  movement  of  6^",  and  can  be 
lowered  i8)4"  from  centre  of  spindle. 

The  Feed  of  table,  28",  is  automatic  in  either  direction,  and 
there  are  1 2  changes  of  feed,  obtained  by  transposing  the  feed 
pulleys,  page  60  and  61,  held  in  place  by  knurled  nuts,  varying 
from  .006"  to  .133"  in  the  rack  feed  machine  and  from  .005"  to 
.117"  in  the  screw  feed  machine,  to  one  revolution  of  spindle. 


6o 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


SPIN, 


FEED 
SHAFT 


FEED  TABLE  FOR  N0.2  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE 
SCREW   FEED. 


INCHES  PER  MINUTE. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 


6l 


FEED  TABLE  FOR  No.  2  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE. 
RACK  FEED. 


SPIN. 


FEED 
SHAFT 


STUD 


FEED  PER 
REV.  OF 

SPINDLE. 


.006 


.010 


.016 


.016 


.020 


.025 


.032 


.011 


.051 


.051 


.080 


.133 


SPINDLE 
SPEEDS 


32 


52 


85 


126 


203 


330 


TRAVEL  OF  TABLE  IN   INCHES  PER  MINUTE. 


16 


I 


•t 


4 


4 


«i 


- 
16 


10* 


10 


181 


26 


A  15 
b!6 


16 


27 


44 


62  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

Adjustable  Dials,  graduated  to  read  to  thousandths  of  an  inch, 
indicate  the  transverse  and  vertical  movements  of  table. 

The  Frame  is  hollow  and  fitted  as  a  closet  to  hold  the  small 
parts  that  accompany  the  machine.  On  the  left  side  of  the  frame 
there  is. a  pan  for  holding  small  tools,  etc.,  and  on  the  front  of 
this  there  is  a  rack  for  wrenches. 

The  Vise,  with  Rack  Feed  Machine,  is  flanged  and  has  jaws 
6%"  wide,  iy^"  deep  and  opens  3^3". 

The  Vise,  with  Screw  Feed  Machine,  swivels  and  has  a 
graduated  base.  The  ja\vs  are  5^"  wide,  i^"  deep,  and  will 
open  2^4". 

The  Counter-Shaft  has  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  14"  in  diam- 
eter, for  3^/2''  belts,  and  should  run  about  180  revolutions  per 
minute. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment,  about  2225  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  1750  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  Rack  Feed  Machine,  68"x45";  Screw  Feed 
Machine,  7Q//X45//. 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  machine  is  shipped,  50"  x  34"  x  62  ". 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  vise,  oil  can,  collet,  wrenches, 
Treatise  on  Milling  Machines,  and  everything  shown  in  cut, 
together  with  overhead  works. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


MILLING  TABLE  WAYS  IN  BED. 


64  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

No.   3 

34  in.  x  7  in.  x  19  3-4  in. 

PLAIN   MILLING  MACHINE. 


The  table  has  an  automatic  longitudinal  feed  of  34",  a  trans- 
verse movement  of  7",  and  can  be  lowered  19^"  from  centre  of 
spindle. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  65 


No.   3 

34  in.  x  7  in.  x  19  3-4  in. 

PLAIN    MILLING  MACHINE. 


When  desired,  we  furnish  this  machine  fitted  with  an  oil  pump. 
When  so  fitted  the  oil  channels  are  larger  and  a  tank  is  pro- 
vided. 

The  Spindle  has  a  hole  ^ "  in  diameter  its  entire  length,  and 
runs  in  bronze  boxes  provided  with  means  of  compensation  for 
wear.  For  method  of  adjustment  see  page  17.  The  front  end 
is  threaded,  and  has  a  No.  1 1  taper  hole. 

The  Cone  has  3  steps,  the  largest  n"  diameter,  for  3^"  belt, 
and  is  back  geared,  giving,  with  two  speeds  of  counter-shaft,  12 
changes  of  speed'.  The  gears  are  covered. 

The  Overhanging  Arm  has  a  hole  for  a  centre,  or  for  a  bear- 
ing for  outer  end  of  arbor,  etc.  It  can  be  easily  reversed  to 
receive  an  attachment,  turned  out  of  the  way,  or  removed.  The 
distance  from  the  centre  of  the  spindle  to  the  arm  is  6^";  great- 
est distance  from  end  of  spindle  to  centre  in  arm,  21".  An  arm 
support  is  furnished  and  with  this  in  position  milling  can  be 
done  to  15^"  from  face  of  column. 

The  Table,  including  oil  pans  and  channels,  is  50"  long,  12" 
wide,  13^"  when  fitted  with  oil  pump,  has  a  working  surface 
42" xi 2",  3  T  slots,  $/%"  wide,  a  transverse  movement  of  7",  6" 
when  fitted  with  oil  pump,  and  can  be  lowered  19%"  from  centre 
of  spindle. 

The  Feed  of  table,  34",  is  automatic  in  either  direction,  and 
there  are  16  changes  of  feed,  obtained  by  transposing  the  feed 
pulleys,  page  66,  held  in  place  by  knurled  nuts,  varying  from 
.004"  to  .332"  to  one  revolution  of  spindle. 


66 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.     CO. 


FEED  TABLE  FOR  NO.  3  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE. 


.004 


006 


009 .013.018 .019 .027 .030.040 .045.063 .068 .095 


142 


.212 


332 


SPINDLE 
SPEEDS 


TRAVEL  OF  TABLE  IN  INCHES  PER  MINUTE. 


23 


16 


1* 


n-3_ 
216 


30 


•I 


10 


A 


§ 


ql 

O  4. 


10 


78. 

7 16 


44 


9l 


52 


A 


Q  9 
3I6 


rr 

7s 


11 


17* 


68 


1 


-•  5. 
J-16 


3nr 


127 


i| 


18 


27 


42 


164 


It 


lit 


15f 


34 


189 


4. 


H 


18 


26| 


40 


62| 


244 


M 


i 


ii 


. 
M 


11 


81 


288 


i 


e  3 
5  IB 


19 


27 


41 


61 


371 


it 


3ft 


10 


78i 


123 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


68  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

Adjustable  Dials,  graduated  to  read  to  thousandths  of  an  inch, 
indicate  the  transverse  and  vertical  movements  of  table. 

The  Frame  is  hollow  and  fitted  as  a  closet  to  hold  the  small 
parts  that  accompany  the  machine.  On  the  left  side  there  is  a 
pan  for  holding  small  tools,  etc.,  and  on  the  front  of  this  there 
is  a  rack  for  wrenches. 

The  Vise  is  Hanged  and  has  jaws  6^5"  wide,  iTV'  deep,  and 
will  open  3!". 

The  Oil  Pump  and  Fittings,  and  method  of  attaching  the  same 
are  shown  in  Fig.  18.  The  pump  A  is  driven  by  the  pulley  B 
from  the  pulley  on  the  bracket  C,  which  is  in  turn  driven  from  a 
pulley  on  the  counter-shaft.  The  oil  is  pumped  to  and  through 
the  distributing  pipe  D  and  returns  through  the  conductor  E  and 
flexible  tube  F  to  the  tank  G.  A  relief  valve  H  is  supplied,  which 
allows  the  pump  to  be  run  continuously. 

The  Counter-Shaft  has  two  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  14"  and 
18"  in  diameter,  for  4"  belts,  and  should  run  about  200  and  155 
revolutions  per  minute. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment,  about  3275  Ibs  ;  with 
Oil  Pump,  3380  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  2710  ;  with  Oil  Pump,  2800  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  84"x5i". 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  machine  is  shipped,  56"x32f'x  66". 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  vise,  oil  can,  collet,  wrenches, 
Treatise  on  Milling  Machines,  and  everything  shown  in  cut, 
together  with  overhead  works. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 


69 


70  BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 

No.   4 

42  in.  x  8  1-4  in.  x  22  in. 

PLAIN   MILLING  MACHINE 

(No.  6,  Prior  to  1893.) 


The  table  has  an  automatic  longitudinal  feed  of  42",  a  trans- 
verse movement  8^",  and  can  be  lowered  22"  from  centre  of 
spindle. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  71 

No.   4 

42  in.  x  8  1-4  in.  x  22  in. 

PLAIN    MILLING  MACHINE. 

(No  6,  Prior  to  1893.) 


When  desired,  we  furnish  this  machine  fitted  with  an  oil  pump. 
When  so  fitted 'the  oil  channels  are  larger  and  a  tank  is  pro- 
vided. 

The  Spindle  has  a  hole  Y^"  in  diameter  its  entire  length,  and 
runs  in  bronze  boxes  provided  with  means  of  compensation  for 
wear.  For  method  of  adjusting  see  page  17.  The  front  end  is 
threaded,  and  has  a  No.  1 1  taper  hole. 

The  Cone  has  3  steps,  the  largest  13"  diameter,  for  3^"  belt, 
and  is  back  geared,  giving,  with  two  speeds  of  counter-shaft,  12 
changes  of  speed.  The  gears  are  inside  the  column. 

The  Overhanging  Arm  has  a  hole  for  a  centre,  or  for  a  bear- 
ing for  outer  end  of  arbor,  etc.  It  can  be  easily  reversed  to 
receive  an  attachment,  turned  out  of  the  way,  or  removed.  The 
distance  from  the  centre  of  the  spindle  to  the  arm  is  7^" ;  great- 
est distance  from  end  of  spindle  to  centre  in  arm,  26^".  An 
arm  support  is  furnished  and  with  this  in  position  milling  can 
be  done  to  18^"  from  face  of  column. 

The  Table,  including  oil  pans  and  channels,  is  60"  long,  14" 
wide,  i$7/%"  when  fitted  with  oil  pump,  has  a  working  surface 
48"  xi  4",  3  T  slots,  34"  wide,  a  transverse  movement  of  8^'' ', 
y-J"  when  fitted  with  oil  pump,  and  can  be  lowered  22"  from 
centre  of  spindle. 

The  Feed  of  table,  42",  is  automatic  in  either  direction,  and 
there  are  12  changes  of  feed,  obtained  by  transposing  the  feed 
pulleys,  page  73,  held  in  place  by  knurled  nuts,  varying  from 
.005"  to  .236"  to  one  revolution  of  spindle. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.  '  CO. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 


73 


FEED  TABLE  FOR  NO.  4  PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE. 


SPIN. 


FEED 
SHAFT 


STUD 


FEED  PER. 
REV.   OF 
SPINDLE 


005    .007    .011    .017    .027    .028    .040    .041    .062    .099    .159    .236 


SPINDLE 
SPEEDS 


TRAVEL  OF  TABLE  IN  INCHES  PER  MINUTE 


14 


o  5 

d!6 


18 


23 


30 


21 


3 


32 


39 


16 


if 


50 


if 


llf 


112 


IT 


A15 
6  16 


" 


17  f 


26  1 


144 


15 


23 


34 


186 


18  1 


44 


240 


6f 


• 


23  1 


38  ^ 


56 


310 
400 


12- 


16 


30 


39 


49  T 


73 


74  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

Figure  19  shows  a  cross  section  of  the  table  and  knee  of  a 
Plain  Milling  Machine.  The  longitudinal  hand  feed  is  through 
the  shaft  A,  bevel  gears  B  B,  and  the  shaft  D,  to  which  the  pinion 
is  attached,  engaging  in  the  rack  E.  The  power  feed  is  driven 
from  the  side  through  worm  and  worm  gears  to  a  bevel  gear,  the 
centre  of  which  is  at  C,  engaging  in  the  bevel  gear  B,  and  driven 
as  by  hand.  A  T  slot  on  the  back  of  the  table  is  provided  for 
bolts  to  hold  stops,  against  which  work  can  be  placed  when  it  is 
desired  to  locate  it  from  the  back  of  the  table,  G. 

Adjustable  Dials,  graduated  to  read  to  thousandths  of  an  inch, 
indicate  the  transverse  and  vertical  movements  of  table. 

Oil  Pump.  For  sketch  and  description  of  method  of  applying 
oil  pump  see  pages  67  and  68. 

The  Frame  is  hollow  and  fitted  as  a  closet  to  hold  the  small 
parts  that  accompany  the  machine.  On  the  left  side  there  is  a 
pan  for  holding  small  tools,  etc.,  and  on  the  front  of  this  there  is 
a  rack  for  wrenches. 

The  Vise  is  flanged  and  has  jaws  y-J"  wide,  i^j"  deep,  and 
will  open  4^". 

The  Counter-Shaft  has  two  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  14"  and 
1 8"  in  diameter,  for  4"  belts,  and  should  run  about  200  and  155 
revolutions  per  minute. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment,  about  4100  Ibs ;  with 
Oil  Pump,  4470  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  3590  Ibs;  with  Oil  Pump,  3740  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  102"  x  $9". 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  machine  is  shipped,  62"  x  39"  x  67". 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  vise,  oil  can,  collet,  wrenches, 
Treatise  on  Milling  Machines,  and  everything  shown  in  cut, 
together  with  overhead  works. 


BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


75 


, 


UNIVERSITY 


OF 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

No  5 

48  in.  x  9  3-4  in.  x  1  9  1  -2  in. 

PLAIN   MILLING  MACHINE 

(No.  8,  Prior  to   1893.) 


The  table  has  an  automatic  longitudinal  feed  of  48",  a  trans- 
verse movement  of  9^/r,  and  can  be  lowered  19 /4"  from  centre 
of  spindle. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  77 


No  5 

48  in.  x  9  3-4  in.  x  19  1-2  in. 

PLAIN   MILLING   MACHINE 

(No.  8,  Prior  to   1893.) 

Patented  Oct.  18,  1802. 


When  desired,  we  furnish  this  machine  fitted  with  an  oil  pump. 
When  so  fitted  the  oil  channels  are  larger  and  a  tank  is  pro- 
vided. 

The  Spindle  has  a  hole  y^"  in  diameter  its  entire  length,  and 
runs  in  bronze  boxes  provided  with  means  of  compensation  for 
wear.  The  front  end  has  a  No.  1 2  taper  hole. 

The  Cone  has  3  steps,  the  largest  13^"  diameter,  for  4^" 
belt,  and  is  back  geared,  giving,  with  two  speeds  of  counter-shaft, 
12  changes  of  speed.  The  gears  are  inside  the  column. 

The  Overhanging  Arm  has  a  hole  for  a  centre,  or  for  a  bear- 
ing for  outer  end  of  arbor,  etc.  It  can  be  easily  pushed  back 
from  the  table.  The  distance  from  the  centre  of  the  spindle  to 
the  arm  is  8"  ;  greatest  distance  from  end  of  spindle  to  centre  in 
arm,  24".  An  arm  support  is  furnished,  and  with  this  in  position, 
milling  can  be  done  to  26"  from  face  of  column. 

The  Table,  including  oil  pans  and  channels,  is  66^"  long,  16" 
wide,  1 8"  when  fitted  with  oil  pump,  and  has  a  working  surface 
54//xi6",  3  T  slots,  y±"  wide,  a  transverse  movement  of  9%", 
8/i"  when  fitted  with  oil  pump,  and  can  be  lowered  19^"  from 
centre  of  spindle. 

The  Feed  of  table,  48"  is  automatic  in  either  direction,  and 
there  are  8  changes  of  feed,  obtained  by  transposing  the  feed 
pulleys,  held  in  place  by  knurled  nuts,  varying  from  .023"  to  .2$" 
to  one  revolution  of  spindle. 


78  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

Adjustable  Dials,  graduated  to  read  to  thousandths  of  an  inch, 
indicate  the  transverse  and  vertical  movements  of  table. 

Oil  Pump.  For  sketch  and  description  of  method  of  applying 
see  pages  67  and  68. 

The  Frame  is  hollow  and  fitted  as  a  closet  to  hold  the  small 
parts  that  accompany  the  machine.  On  the  left  side  there  is  a 
pan  for  holding  small  tools,  etc.,  and  on  the  front  of  this  there  is  a 
rack  for  wrenches. 

The  Vise  is  flanged  and  has  jaws  yj"  wide,  ifa"  deep,  and 
will  open  4^". 

The  Counter-Shaft  has  two  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  16"  and 
20"  in  diameter,  for  5"  belts,  and  should  run  about  140  and  112 
revolutions  per  minute. 

Weight  ready  for  shipment,  6160  Ibs.;  with  Oil  Pump, 
6400  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  5150  Ibs.;  with  Oil  Pump,  5250  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,    H5"x69". 

Dimensions  of  boxes  in  which  machine  is  shipped,  67"  x  42" 
x67"  and  66"  x  2i"x  21". 

Each  machine  is  provided  with  vise,  oil  can,  collet,  wrenches, 
Treatise  on  Milling  Machines,  and  everything  shown  in  cut, 
together  with  overhead  works. 


BROWN    A    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


79 


MILLING  STEEL  MOTOR  PINIONS. 


8o  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

No.   12 

1  7  1-2  in.  x  5-8  in.  x  8  in. 

PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINE. 

(No.  2,  Prior  to  1893.) 


The  table  has  an  automatic  longitudinal  feed  of  17^",  the 
spindle  has  a  transverse  adjustment  of  5/s",  and  the  greatest  dis- 
tance from  centre  of  spindle  to  top  of  table  is  8". 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  8 1 


No.   12 

1  7  1  -2  in.  x  5-8  in.  x  7  1  -2  in. 

PLAIN  MILLING   MACHINE. 

(No.  2,  Prior  to  1893.) 


This  machine  by  reason  of  its  rigidity  and  the  ease  with  which 
the  table  can  be  moved  by  hand  makes  it  well  adapted  for  the 
rapid  and  economical  production  of  many  parts  of  machine 
tools,  bicycles,  electrical  instruments,  guns,  etc. 

The  Spindle  runs  in  bronze  boxes  provided  with  means  of  com- 
pensation for  wear.  It  is  driven  from  cone  by  gear  and  pinion, 
has  a  vertical  adjustment  by  means  of  nuts  placed  on  a  vertical 
screw,  and  a  transverse  adjustment  of  f".  The  front  end  has  a 
No.  10  taper  hole. 

The  Cone  has  3  steps,  the  largest  I2-J"  in  diameter,  for  2^" 
belt. 

The  Overhanging  Arm  has  an  adjustable  centre  support  and 
brace.  Distance  from  centre  of  spindle  to  arm,  3Ty';  greatest 
distance  from  end  of  spindle  to  centre  in  arm,  with  arm  brace  in 
position,  7^4",  without  arm  brace,  9". 

The  Table,  including  oil  pans  and  channels,  is  28"  long  and 
10"  wide,  has  a  working  surface  i9"x6",  and  a  T  slot  f"  wide. 
Greatest  distance  from  centre  of  spindle  to  top  of  table,  7^2", 
least,  2^". 

The  Feed  of  table,  of  17^",  is  automatic  and  can  be  auto- 
matically released  at  any  point.  There  are  three  changes  of  feed, 
varying  from  .014"  to  .05"  to  one  revolution  of  spindle. 


82 


BROWN    &     SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 


In  addition  to  the  oil  pans  and  channels  surrounding  the  table, 
an  oil  tank  is  attached  to  each  machine  providing  for  the  use  of  a 
pump. 

The  Vise  has  jaws  6£"  wide,  iTy  deep  and  will  open  3$". 

The  Counter-Shaft  has  tight  and  loose  pulleys  10"  in  diam- 
eter for  3"  belts,  and  should  run  about  280  revolutions  per 
minute. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment;  about  1950  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  1600  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  46"x45/'. 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  machine  is  shipped,  43"  x  34"  x  57". 

Each  machine  is  provided  with  vise,  oil  can,  wrenches,  Treatise 
on  Milling  Machines,  and  everything  shown  in  cut,  together  with 
overhead  works. 


MILLING   TABLE    WAYS. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

No.  12 
PLAIN   MILLING  MACHINE. 

J 


Arranged  for  Sprocket  Wheel  Cutting. 


84  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

MACHINES    FOR     BICYCLE    WORK, 


Development  of  the  bicycle  manufacturing  business  has  called 
for  a  great  variety  of  machines  specially  adapted  for  bicycle 
work. 

On  page  83  is  shown  our  No.  12  Plain  Milling  Machine, 
described  in  detail  on  pages  81  and  82,  fitted  with  single  dial 
index  centres.  By  this  method  gangs  of  sprocket  wheels  can  be 
placed  upon  arbors,  and  by  using  a  cutter  specially  made  for  the 
purpose  two  teeth  can  be  cut  at  one  time. 

The  Index  Plate  is  provided  with  hardened  steel  taper  bush- 
ings, and  is  covered,  thus  protecting  the  holes  from  dirt.  A  hard- 
ened steel  taper  pin  is  forced  into  the  bushing  by  a  spring,  and 
can  be  released  by  a  lever,  when  the  work  can  be  rotated  by  a 
hand  wheel,  thus  making  the  indexing  very  rapid.  While  the 
plates  can  be  used,  usually,  for  other  than  the  number  of  teeth 
for  which  they  are  made,  it  is  desirable  to  have  them  contain 
holes  for  the  actual  number  of  teeth  to  be  cut,  as  mistakes  can 
then  be  avoided. 

The  Foot-Stock  is  provided  with  a  bearing  instead  of  a  centre, 
which  gives  the  arbor  a  firm  support. 

Gangs  of  sprockets  from  6"  to  7"  long  can  be  milled. 

If  single  cutters  are  used,  cutting  one  tooth  at  a  time,  a  set  of 
four  cutters  will  cut  7,  8,  17,  18,  19  and  20-tooth  sprockets. 

We  also  show  on  page  85  the  same  machine  fitted  for  cutting 
chain  centres.  By  means  of  a  special  holding  device,  a  number  of 
these  centres  can  be  cut  at  one  time,  the  number  being  limited  by 
the  size  of  the  chain  and  the  distance  between  the  face  of  the 
spindle  and  the  centre  in  the  arm. 

Other  operations  can  be  profitably  done  on  some  of  the  other 
machines  described  in  the  preceding  pages. 

By  consultation  with  those  interested  in  bicycle  manufac- 
ture, many  methods  may  be  designed  by  which  the  work  may  be 
greatly  facilitated. 


BROWN    &     SHARP  E    MFG.    CO. 


NO.  12  PLAIN   MILLING  MACHINE  ARRANGED  FOR  CUTTING 
BICYCLE  CHAIN  CENTRES. 


86  BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.     CO. 

No-  13 

1  5  in.  x  3  in.  x  6  3-8  in. 

PLAIN   MILLING  MACHINE 

(No.  3,  Prior  to  1893.) 


The  table  has  an  automatic  longitudinal  feed  of  15",  a  trans- 
verse movement  of  3",  and  the  greatest  distance  from  centre  of 
spindle  to  top  of  table  is  6^". 


BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  87 


No.   13 

15  in.  x3in.  x6  3-8  in. 

PLAIN   MILLING  MACHINE. 

(No.  3,  Prior  to  1893.) 


This  machine  combines  power  and  rigidity  with  ease  of 
handling,  making  it  especially  valuable  in  milling  the  heavier  cuts 
on  bicycle  and  sewing  machine  parts  and  other  work  of  this 
class. 

The  Spindle  runs  in  boxes  provided  with  means  of  compensa- 
tion for  wear.  It  is  driven  from  cone  by  gear  and  pinion  and 
has  a  vertical  adjustment  by  means  of  nuts  placed  on  a  vertical 
screw.  The  front  end  has  a  No.  10  taper  hole. 

The  Cone  has  3  steps,  the  largest  13"  in  diameter,  for  3" 
belt. 

The  Overhanging  Arm  has  an  adjustable  centre  support  and 
an  arm  brace.  Distance  from  centre  of  spindle  to  arm,  2^"; 
greatest  distance  from  end  of  spindle  to  centre  in  arm,  1 1 ". 

The  Table,  including  oil  pans  and  channels,  is  31^2"  long 
and  10^"  wide,  has  a  working  surface  27 "x  8",  2  T  slots  y^'f 
wide  and  a  transverse  movement  of  3".  Greatest  distance  from 
centre  of  spindle  to  top  of  table,  6^";  least,  3^  ". 

The  Feed  of  table,  of  15",  is  automatic  and  can  be  auto- 
matically released  at  any  point.  It  is  a  screw  feed  and  can  be 
quickly  returned  by  hand.  There  are  three  changes  of  feed, 
varying  from  .015"  to  .04"  to  one  revolution  of  spindle. 

In  addition  to  the  oil  pans  and  channels  surrounding  the  table, 
an  oil  tank  is  attached  to  each  machine  providing  for  the  use  of  a 
pump. 


88 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


The  Vise  has  jaws  6^"  wide,  iTy  deep,  and  will  open  3^". 

The  Counter-Shaft  has  tight  and  loose  pulleys  10"  in  diam- 
eter for  3}^"  belt,  and  should  run  about  375  revolutions  per 
minute. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment,  about  2650  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  2240  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  47"x5o". 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  machine  is  shipped,  50"  x  38"  x  59". 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  vise,  oil  can,  wrenches,  Treatise 
on  Milling  Machines,  and  everything  shown  in  cut,  together  with 
overhead  works. 


PLAIN  MILLING. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


89 


MILLING  CARRIAGE  WAY- 


m  m 


MILLING  HANGER  COXES. 


9°  BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 

No.   23 

49  in.  x  9  in.  x  19  in. 

PLAIN   MILLING  MACHINE 

(No.  5,  Prior  to  1893.) 


The  table  has  an  automatic  feed  of  49",  the  head  has  a  trans- 
verse movement  of  9",  and  the  table  can  be  lowered  19"  from 
centre  of  spindle. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.     CO.  91 


No.   23 

49  in.  x  9  in.  x  19  in. 

PLAIN   MILLING  MACHINE. 

(No.  5,  Prior  to  1893.) 


This  machine  is  especially  adapted  for  work  requiring  large 
table  capacity  and  long  cuts. 

The  Spindle  is  hollow,  runs  in  bronze  boxes  provided  with 
means  of  compensation  for  wear,  and  is  driven  by  a  worm  and 
worm  gear.  The  worm  is  of  steel,  hardened,  and  the  worm  gear 
of  bronze.  The  worm  gear  runs  in  oil.  The  front  end  of  spindle 
is  threaded  and  has  a  No.  1 1  taper  hole. 

The  Cone  has  3  steps,  the  largest  iof6"  in  diameter,  for  2*4" 
belt,  and  with  two  speeds  of  counter  gives  6  changes  of  speed. 

The  Head  has  a  transverse  movement  of  9". 

The  Overhanging  Arm  can  be  removed  or  turned  out  of  the 
way.  Distance  from  centre  of  spindle  to  arm,  5^";  greatest 
distance  from  end  of  spindle  to  centre  in  arm,  15".  A  lon^  and 
a  short  arm  support  are  furnished  and  with  one  of  these  in  pos'.hon 
milling  can  be  done  to  15"  from  face  of  column. 

The  Table,  including  oil  pans  and  channels,  is  59"  long  and 
10"  wide,  has  a  working  surface  5of"x  10",  3  T  slots,  y^"  wide 
and  can  be  lowered  19"  from  centre  of  spindle. 

The  Feed  of  table,  of  49",  is  automatic  in  either  direction  and 
can  be  automatically  released  at  any  point.  It  is  driven  by  a 
friction  disk  with  connections  that  automatically  adjust  themselves 
to  any  position  of  head  and  knee,  and  can  be  quickly  changed 
from  o  to  .10"  to  one  revolution  of  spindle. 

Dials  graduated  to  read  to  i6ths,  32nds,  etc.,  and  to  thou- 
sandths of  an  inch  indicate  the  transverse  movement  of  head  and 
vertical  movement  of  table. 


92 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


The  Vise  is  flanged  and  has  jaws  7^"  wide,  1/6"  deep,  and 
will  open  4J^". 

The  Counter-Shaft  has  tight  and  loose  pulleys  10"  and  14"  in 
diameter  for  3"  and  3/4"  belts,  and  should  run  about  450  and 
300  revolutions  per  minute. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment,  about  3100  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  2600  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  45/'xiio". 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  machine  is  shipped,  50"  x  37"  x  65". 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  vise,  oil  can,  collet,  wrenches, 
Treatise  on  Milling  Machines,  and  everything  shown  in  cut, 
together  with  overhead  works. 


MILLING  T  SLOTS  IN  TABLE. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO.  93 


No.  24 

6O  in.  x  12  in.  x  17  5-8  in,  and 
72in.x  12  in.  x  17  5-8  in. 

PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINES. 

(No.  7,  Prior  to  1893.) 


The  No.  24  Plain  Milling  Machine  is  similar  in  general  design 
and  construction  to  the  No.  23  Plain  Milling  Machine.  All  the 
parts  are  larger  and  heavier,  however,  and  thus  greater  capacity 
and  efficiency  are  obtained. 

The  Spindle  is  hollow,  runs  in  bronze  boxes  provided  with 
means  of  compensation  for  wear,  and  is  driven  by  a  worm  and 
worm  gear.  The  worm  is  of  steel,  hardened,  and  the  worm  gear 
of  bronze.  The  worm  gear  runs  in  oil.  The  front  end  of  spindle 
is  threaded  and  has  a  No.  1 2  taper  hole. 

The  Cone  has  3  steps,  the  largest  12"  in  diameter,  for  3"  belt, 
and  with  two  speeds  of  counter,  gives  6  changes  of  speed. 

The  Head  has  a  transverse  movement  of  12". 

The  Overhanging  Arm  can  be  removed  or  turned  out  of  the 
way.  Distance  from  centre  of  spindle  to  arm,  5T9¥" ;  greatest 
distance  from  end  of  spindle  to  centre  in  arm,  18".  A  long  and 
short  arm  support  are  furnished,  and  with  one  of  these  in  position 
milling  can  be  done  to  17-3-"  from  face  of  column. 

The  Table,  including  oil  pans  and  channels,  is  69"  long  and 
14^"  wide,  has  a  working  surface  60"  x  14^",  5  T  slots  y^"  wide, 
and  can  be  lowered  lyf"  below  the  centre  of  spindle. 

The  Feed  of  table,  of  60",  is  automatic  in  either  direction.  It 
is  driven  by  a  friction  disk  with  connections  that  automatically 
adjust  themselves  to  any  position  of  head  and  knee,  and  can  be 
quickly  changed  from  o  to  .08"  to  one  revolution  of  spindle. 


94  BROWN    A    SHARPE    MFG.     CO. 

Dials  graduated  to  read  to  i6ths,  32nds,  etc.,  and  to  thou- 
sandths of  an  inch  indicate  the  transverse  movement  of  head  and 
vertical  movement  of  table. 

The  Vise  is  flanged  and  has  jaws  y-J"  wide,  iJ/%"  deep,  and 
will  open  4^-". 

The  Counter-Shaft  has  tight  and  loose  pulleys  12"  and  18"  in 
diameter  for  3^"  and  4^-"  belts,  and  should  run  about  300  and 
200  revolutions  per  minute. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment,  about  4325  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  3700  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  52  "x  129". 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  machine  is  shipped,  63"  x  39"  x  67". 

This  machine  is  also  furnished  with  table  72"  long. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment,  about  4700  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  3950  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  52"  x  153". 

Dimensions  of  boxes  in  which  machine  with  this  table  is 
shipped,  57"  x  51  "x  68"  and  77"xi9"x8". 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  vise,  oil  can,  collet,  wrenches, 
Treatise  on  Milling  Machines,  and  overhead  works. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

No.  2 

41  in.  x  12  in.  x  1  5  in. 

Vertical  Spindle   Milling  Machine, 
A 


95 


This  machine  has  a  longitudinal  feed  of  41"  and  a  transverse 
feed  of  12".     Greatest  distance  from  end  of  spindle  to  table,  15". 


96  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


No.  2 

41  in.  x  12  in.  x  15  in. 

VERTICAL   SPINDLE   MILLING 
MACHINE. 


This  machine,  for  many  kinds  of  work,  is  preferable  to  a  ma- 
chine with  a  horizontal  spindle.  The  operator  can  more  easily 
see  the  work  and  more  readily  follow  any  irregularity  in  the  outline 
of  the  surface  to  be  milled.  All  the  movements  of  the  table  are 
controlled  from  the  front  of  the  machine. 

The  Spindle  runs  in  bronze  boxes  provided  with  means  of 
compensation  for  wear.  It  is  back  geared  and  has,  with  two 
speeds  of  counter,  12  changes  of  speed.  It  has  a  No.  n  taper 
hole.  The  arbors  can  be  held  by  a  bolt  passing  through  the 
spindle. 

The  Cone  has  3  steps  for  3"  belt,  and  can  be  set  parallel  with, 
or  at  right  angles  to  the  bed. 

The  Vertical  Adjustment  of  13^"  is  obtained  by  raising  or 
lowering  the  column  ;  a  fine  adjustment  of  iTV  is  obtained  by 
means  of  a  collar  nut  that  is  graduated  to  read  to  thousandths  of 
an  inch.  The  greatest  distance,  from  end  of  spindle  to  top  of 
table,  is",  the  least,  itf". 

Distance  from  centre  of  spindle  to  column,  13^2". 

The  Table,  including  oil  pans  and  channels,  is  53"  long  and 
16"  wide,  has  a  working  surface  41"  x  13%",  3  T  slots  %"  wide. 

The  Feeds  of  table  are  automatic  in  either  direction.  The 
longitudinal  feed  is  41"  and  the  transverse  feed  is  12",  and  both 
can  be  automatically  released  at  any  point.  There  are  8  changes 
of  feed  for  each  direction  varying  from  .006"  to  .056"  to  one 
revolution  of  the  spindle. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


97 


The  Counter-shaft  has  friction  pulleys  12"  and  16"  in  diam- 
eter for  3^"  and  4"  belts,  and  should  run  about  220  and  165 
revolutions  per  minute. 

Weight  of  machine  ready  for  shipment,  about  5250  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  4400  Ibs. 

Floor  Space,  ioo"xy8". 

Dimensions  of  box  in  which  each  machine  is  shipped,  69"  x  45'' 
x83". 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  collet,  oil  can  and  stand, 
wrenches,  Treatise  on  Milling  Machines,  and  overhead  works. 


CIRCULAR    MILLING   ATTACHMENT. 


This  Attachment,  for  the  No,  2  Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Machine, 
is  of  service  in  milling  circles,  segments  cf  circles,  circular  slots, 
etc.,  on  plain  and  irregularly  shaped  pieces.  It  is  bolted  to  the 
table  of  the  machine  and  when  so  placed  can  be  adjusted  to  any 
desired  position. 

By  the  addition  of  this  attachment,  the  machine  is  fully  equipped 
to  do  all  varieties  of  straight  and  circular  milling  within  its  capac- 
ity. 


The  Table  is 


in  diameter  and  has  6  T  slots 


wide. 


The  Feed  of  table  is  automatic  and  can  be  automatically  re- 
leased at  any  point.  There  are  8  changes  of  feed. 

The  Attachment  is  4^"  high. 

Weight  ready  for  shipment,  about  325  Ibs. 

Net  Weight,  about  250  Ibs. 

Each  Attachment  is  furnished  with  bracket  and  pulleys  for 
attaching  it  to  the  machine. 


98 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


GEAR    CUTTING    ATTACHMENT. 

For  No.  1   Universal  Milling  Machine,  Design  Prior 
to    1895. 


This  attachment  is  for  use  in  cutting  gear  wheels,  and  wheels 
larger  and  heavier  than  can  be  cut  with  the  ordinary  apparatus 
belonging  to  the  No.  i  Universal  Milling  Machine,  design  prior 
to  1895.  It  swings  14",  and  is  furnished  with  a  20"  index  plate 
containing  4294  holes.  It  will  divide  all  numbers  to  75,  and  all 
even  numbers  to  150.  Arbors  fitted  to  the  No.  i  Universal 
Milling  Machine  can  be  used  in  this  attachment.  The  screw 
with  set  nuts  over  the  spindle  is  designed  as  a  support  for  the 
wheel  while  being  cut.  Weight,  boxed,  440  Ibs. 

The  Head  and  Foot-Stock  of  this  attachment  can  be  fitted  for 
use  upon  the  Nos.  i,  design  of  1895,  2,  3  and  4,  design  of  1893, 
Universal,  and  the  Nos.  i,  2,  3,  4,  5,  23  and  24  Plain  Milling 
Machines. 


BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


99 


VERTICAL    SPINDLE    MILLING 
ATTACHMENTS. 

For  Nos.  1,2,3  and  4  Universal,  and  Nos.   1 ,  2,  and  3, 
Plain  Milling  Machines. 


These  attachments  are  used  for  a  large  range  of  light  milling, 
and  are  of  special  advantage  for  key-seating,  die-sinking,  cutting 
T  slots,  spiral  gears  or  worms,  sawing  stock  when  in  lengths 
greater  than  can  be  placed  at  right  angles  to  the  table,  etc. 

The  holder  or  frame  is  secured  to  the  overhanging  arm,  and 
the  horizontal  shaft  is  inserted  in  the  cone  spindle  of  the  machine. 
The  vertical  spindle  is  driven  by  the  horizontal  shaft  through 
spiral  gears. 

The  spindle  can  be  set  at  any  angle  from  a  vertical  to  a  hori- 
zontal position.  The  position  is  indicated  on  the  base  of  spindle 
head  which  is  graduated. 


Machine   on   which  at- 
tachment is  used, 
Taper  Hole  in  Spindle, 


Nos.  i  &  2  Univ. 
Nos.  i  &  2  Plain. 

7 


Nos.  3  &:  4  Univ. 
No.    3  Plain. 
9 


100 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


VERTICAL  SPINDLE  MILLING  ATTACHMENT  ARRANGED  TO  SAW  OFF 

STOCK. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


101 


102  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


VERTICAL  SPINDLE  MILLING 
ATTACHMENTS 

For  Nos.  4  and  5   Plain  and    No.  4,  Design   1893,  Uni- 
versal  Milling   Machines. 


The  holder    or  frame   is  secured  to  the  frame  of  the  machine, 
and  the  horizontal  shaft  is  inserted  in  the  spindle  of  the  machine. 

The  vertical  spindle  is  driven  by  the  horizontal  shaft  through 
bevel  gears. 

The   spindle   can  be- set  at  any  angle  from  a  vertical  to  a  hori- 
zontal position.     The  position  is  indicated  on  the  base  of  spindle 
head,  which  is  graduated. 
Machine  on  which  Attach-  )  No.  4  Plain  and  No.  4        No.  5,  Plain. 

ment  is  used.  )     Univ.  Design  1893. 

Taper  Hole  in  Spindle,  9  1 1 

Distance  from  Centre   of)  ^i/,  jn>  It  in 

spindle  to  Column,       > 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  103 

VERTICAL    SPINDLE    MILLING 
ATTACHMENT 

For  No.  24  Plain  Milling  Machines. 

The  holder  or  frame  is  secured  to  the  overhanging  arm,  and 
the  vertical  spindle  is  driven  by  a  worm  and  a  worm  wheel  by  a 
belt  from  cone  of  the  machine. 

On  certain  classes  of  work  two  cuts  can  be  made  simulta- 
neously, one  by  a  cutter  on  the  arbor  in  the  spindle  of  the 
machine,  the  other  by  a  mill  in  the  vertical  spindle  of  the  attach- 
ment. 


HIGH   SPEED    MILLING   ATTACHMENT 
AND  DRIVING   FIXTURE 

For    Nos.   1  and  2  Universal  and   1  and  2    Plain    Milling 

Machines. 


The  cut  on  the  left  represents  the  High  Speed  Milling  Attach- 
ment, which  is  of  service  for  light  or  finishing  cuts  with  end  mills, 
and  consists  of  a  small  collet  or  spindle  running  in  a  hardened 
shell  that  fits  the  hole  in  the  cone  spindle  of  the  machine.  It  can 


104 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


DRIVING  FIXTURE  FOR  HIGH  SPEED  MILLING  ATTACHMENT. 
Method  of  Using  when  a  Quick  Feed   is  required   for  the  Table. 


BROWN    •&    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  105 

be  driven  directly  from  an  extra  pulley  on  the  counter-shaft,  and 
thus  small  mills  may  be  run  much  faster  than  the  usual  speed  of 
the  cone  spindle.  When  the  attachment  is  thus  driven,  the  cone 
pulley  is  stationary. 

The  cut  on  the  right  represents  the  Driving  Fixture,  which 
consists  of  a  cast  iron  arm  that  can  be  readily  placed  in  a  milling 
machine,  in  the  place  of  the  overhanging  arm,  and  can  be  applied 
without  additional  overhead  works. 

There  is  a  shaft  running  in  the  upper  end  that  has  a  pulley  on 
each  end  of  it.  The  pulley  on  the  back  is  to  be  belted  to  the 
front  step  of  the  cone  of  the  machine.  The  front  pulley  is  to  be 
belted  to  the  fixture  that  is  to  be  placed  in  the  taper  hole  of  the 
spindle. 

The  advantage  of  this  method  of  driving  is  that  the  steps  of  the 
cone  pulley  are  free  to  be  run  in  the  usual  manner,  and  thus  dif- 
ferent speeds  can  be  obtained  for  the  end  mill. 

On  the  No.  i  Universal  and  No.  i  Plain  Milling  Machine  there 
are  4  changes  of  speed,  from  342  to  1537  revolutions  per  minute, 
and  on  the  No.  2  Universal  and  No.  2  Plain  Milling  Machines 
there  are  3  changes  of  speed,  from  603  to  1584  revolutions  per 
minute. 


106  BROWN    A    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

HAND    MILLING    ATTACHMENT 

For  No.  O  Plain  Milling  Machine. 


The  No.  o  Plain  Milling  Machine  can  be  quickly  changed  by 
means  of  this  attachment  into  a  hand  milling  machine  with  or 
without  an  automatic  longitudinal  feed. 

An  apron,  placed  on  the  outside  end  of  the  knee,  carries  a  lever 
attached  to  a  segment  of  a  gear  which  runs  in  a  pinion  placed 
over  the  end  of  the  shaft  that  moves  the  table  longitudinally,  and 
this  lever  when  moved  turns  the  shaft  as  the  crank  would  if  it 
were  in  position. 

The  attachment,  with  a  knee  having  a  working  surface  of  6"  x 
5  y^  ",  is  clamped  on  the  table  and  on  this  the  fixtures  for  holding 
the  work  can  be  fastened  as  on  a  hand  milling  machine.  When 
brought  to  position  the  lever  can  be  held  by  the  catch  in  the 
holder,  shown  at  the  left  of  the  cut,  which  can  be  released  by  a 
latch  on  the  back  of  the  lever,  so  that  at  the  same  time  that  the 
knee  is  returned  to  position  the  catch  is  released  without  an  extra 
movement.  While  the  lever  is  held  down,  the  feed  can  be  thrown 
in  and  milling  done  as  on  a  plain  milling  machine. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


107 


The  top  of  the  knee  at  its  lowest  position  is  6"  from  the  top  of 
the  table  and  can  be  raised  2". 

With  this  attachment  in  position  the  milling  machine  table  has 
a  transverse  feed  of  2%".  The  longitudinal  feed  of  the  table  by 
means  of  the  lever  and  gear  segment  is  4",  but  with  these 
removed  the  machine  will  feed  16"  automatically. 


TAPER    MILLING    ATTACHMENT 

For  Nos.   1  and  2  Universal  Milling  Machines. 


This  attachment  is  designed  to  facilitate  the  milling  of  taper 
work.  By  reason  of  its  easy  and  quick  adjustment  to  the  desired 
taper  it  is  especially  desirable  when  a  large  variety  of  such  work 
is  to  be  done. 

It  consists  of  a  table  that  is  suspended  on  a  ring,  which  in  turn 
is  placed  on  an  arbor  to  fit  the  taper  hole  in  the  spiral  head.  The 
head  can  be  set  to  any  desired  angle  to  10°,  and  the  table  will 
take  the  same  position,  keeping  the  centres  always  in  line. 
When  placed  at  the  required  angle  it  is  held  in  position  by  a 
clamp  screw  that  slides  in  a  knee  clamped  to  the  table  of  the 
machine.  By  reason  of  the  location  of  the  clamps  and  the  solid- 
ity of  the  table,  work  is  held  as  firmly  between  the  centres  of  this 
attachment  as  they  are  between  centres  fastened  directly  to  the 
table. 

The  foot-stock  of  the  attachment  slides  in  a  T  slot  $/% "  wide, 
and  can  be  placed  to  take  in  work  to  4^  "  in  diameter  and  17"  in 
length. 

In  ordering  state  whether  it  is  to  be  used  on  the  No.  i  or  No.  2 
Universal  Milling  Machine. 


io8 


BROWN    A     SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


INDEX  HEAD  AND  CENTRES  WITH 
CENTRE  REST. 

PATENTED  FEBRUARY  5,  1884. 


These  Centres  are  designed  for  use  on  Milling  Machines,  but 
the  strength,  stiffness  and  stability  of  the  Index  head  in  all 
posifions  enable  it  also  to  be  advantageously  used  on  Planers, 
Upright  Drills  and  Slotting  Machines. 

The  Centres  swing  12^"  in  diameter. 

The  Head  can  be  set  at  any  angle  from  10  degrees  below  the 
horizontal  to  10  degrees  beyond  the  perpendicular. 

The  Spindle  is  provided  with  a  face  plate  and  adjustable  dog 
carrier.  The  front  end  has  a  No.  1 2  taper  hole.  The  straight 
hole  at  end  of  taper  is  1*2"  in  diameter. 

The  Worm  Wheel  is  6"  in  diameter,  and  one  revolution  is 
made  by  60  revolutions  of  index  crank. 

The  Index  Plates  divide  all  numbers  to  100,  all  even  numbers 
to  134,  and  all  divisible  by  4  to  200. 

The  Table  is  provided  with  flanges,  is  32"  long,  8"  wide,  and 
has  3  T  slots  %  "  wide. 

Combined  Length  of  head  and  foot-stocks,  18". 

Centre  Rest  will  take  work  to  3^"  in  diameter. 

Weight,  about  350  Ibs. 

Table,  index  plates  and  tables  explaining  the  use  of  same, 
wrenches  and  everything  shown  in  cut  are  sent  with  each  pair  of 
centres. 


BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  109 

8  in.  and  6  7-8  in.  SINGLE  DIAL 
INDEX  CENTRES. 


These  Index  Centres  are  intended  for  use  on  milling  or  other 
machines  where  a  limited  amount  of  indexing  is  to  be  done,  as  in 
cutting  teeth  in  sprocket  wheels  or  mills,  or  in  milling  nuts,  etc. 

Two  sizes  are  made,  one  taking  in  work  to  8"  in  diameter  and 
the  other  to  6 y%"  in  diameter. 

The  Spindles  are  threaded  on  the  ends.  The  8"  spindle  has  a 
No.  10  taper  hole  and  the  6j4"  spindle  a  No.  1 1  taper  hole.  The 
6  7^"  centres  are  especially  designed  for  use  in  milling  sprocket 
wheels  in  gangs  and  provision  is  made  for  a  stiff  arbor. 

The  Index  Plate  is-  a  dial  provided  with  hardened  steel  bush- 
ings, and  is  covered,  thus  protecting  the  holes  from  dirt.  A  hard- 
ened steel  taper  pin  is  forced  into  the  bushing  by  a  spring,  and 
can  be  released  by  a  lever,  when  the  work  can  be  rotated  by  a 
hand  wheel,  thus  making  the  indexing  very  rapid.  While  the 
plates  can  be  used,  usually,  for  other  than  the  number  of  teeth 
for  which  they  are  made,  it  is  desirable  to  have  them  contain 
holes  for  the  number  of  teeth  to  be  cut,  as  mistakes  can  thus  be 
avoided. 

The  Dial  furnished  with  the  centres  has  16  holes.  Special 
dials,  with  any  number  of  holes  to  25,  made  to  order. 

The  Tongues  and  Bolts  furnished,  fit  a  T  slot  5/8  "  wide. 

Combined  Length  of  head  and  foot-stocks,  17^2". 

Wrench,  bolts  and  clamps  are  furnished  with  these  centres. 


110  BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

10  INCH    INDEX    CENTRES. 


These  centres  enable  one  to  do  all  of  the  dividing  and  indexing 
work  that  can  be  done  on  a  Universal  Milling  Machine,  excepting 
the  cutting  of  spirals,  or  of  work  that  has  to  be  held  at  an  angle 
to  the  centre  line  of  the  centres. 

The  Centres  swing  io%"  in  diameter. 

The  Spindle  is  threaded  on  front  and  has  a  No.  i  o  taper  hole. 
The  straight  hole  at  end  of  taper  i  -f^"  in  diameter. 

The  Worm  Wheel  is  6*4"  in  diameter,  and  one  revolution  is 
made  by  40  revolutions  of  index  crank.  It  has  24  holes  on  rim, 
and  when  the  worm  is  disengaged  direct  indexing  can  be  done. 
The  wheel  is  held  by  means  of  an  index  pin. 

The  Index  Plates  are  the  same  that  are  used  on  the  No.  i 
Universal  Milling  Machine. 

The  Head-Stock  can  be  clamped  at  any  angle  on  table. 

The  Tongues  and  Bolts  furnished,  fit  a  T  slot  5/8 "  wide.  The 
tongues  are  inserted. 

Combined  Length  of  head  and  foot-stocks, 


12  INCH    INDEX    CENTRES. 

These  Centres  are  of  the  same  general  design  as  the  10"  Index 
Centres  described  above. 

The  Centres  swing  1 2  %  "  in  diameter. 

The  Worm  Wheel  is  7  ^  "  in  diameter. 

The  Tongues  and  Bolts  furnished,  fit  a  T  slot  ^  "  wide. 

Combined  Length  of  head  and  foot-stocks,  16^". 

Index  Plates  and  tables  explaining  the  use  of  same  and 
wrenches  are  sent  with  each  pair  of  Centres. 


BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


Ill 


TOOL-MAKERS'    UNIVERSAL    VISE. 


This  vise  is  of  an  entirely  new  design,  for  use  on  Milling 
Machines  or  Planers,  and  is  so  constructed  that  it  can  be  set  at 
any  angle  to  the  surface  of  the  table  or  to  the  spindle  of  the 
machine,  and  rigidly  clamped  in  position. 

The  base  is  double,  the  upper  portion  is  graduated,  and  can  be 
set  at  any  angle  in  a  horizontal  plane.  On  top  of  the  swivel  base 
is  a  hinged  knee,  which  can  be  set  at  any  angle,  to  90°,  in  a 
vertical  plane.  The  top  of  the  knee  is  graduated.  The  knee  is 
clamped  rigidly  in  position  by  means  of  the  nut  on  end  of  bolt 
forming  hinge,  and  the  locking  levers  shown  at  the  left  of  cut, 
these  levers  are  clamped  in  position  by  the  bolt  shown  in  centre 
and  the  bolts  at  the  ends  of  the  levers. 

The  vise  proper  is  fastened  to  the  hinged  knee  in  such  a  man- 
ner that  it  can  be  set  at  any  angle  on  a  horizontal  plane,  and  can 
be  clamped  in  position  by  the  bolt  which  holds  the  upper  locking 
lever. 

The  vise  base  is  fastened  to  the  table  by  means  of  two  bolts  fit- 
ting into  the  table  T  slot.  The  base  is  provided  with  two  sets  of 
holes  to  allow  for  moving  the  vise,  when  set  in  a  vertical  plane,  in 
order  to  clear  the  Milling  Machine  spindle. 

The  jaws  are  made  of  tool  steel  and  hardened,  are  5^"  wide, 
ij^"  deep  and  will  open  2^". 


112 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


BROWN    A    SHARPE     MFG.    CO.  113 


MATERIAL,  WORKMANSHIP,  DESIGN,  ETC. 


Our  machines  are  made  with  the  intention  that  they 
shall  be  the  best  of  their  respective  classes.  Materials 
are  used  which  experience  has  shown  are  the  most 
suitable  for  the  various  parts,  and  careful  attention  is 
constantly  given  to  insure  good  workmanship. 

Our  buildings  are  modern  and  specially  arranged 
for  the  business.  The  machinery  and  appliances  are 
the  best  attainable.  Our  machines  are  manufactured  in 
large  quantities  with  expensive  special  tools,  and  much 
greater  accuracy  has  been  obtained  than  can  be  reached 
by  the  usual  methods  of  manufacturing.  All  plane  bear- 
ings are  scraped  to  surface  plates ;  all  cylindrical  bear- 
ings are  ground  and  fitted  to  standards.  The  alignments 
are  correct.  The  machines  are  subjected  to  thorough 
inspection  and  when  deemed  necessary,  to  actual  opera- 
tion before  being  packed. 

The  general  design  of  our  Universal  Milling  Machines 
has,  for  thirty  years,  been  appreciated  by  mechanical 
experts,  and  faithfully  imitated  by  almost  every  one  who 
has  desired  to  enter  upon  the  manufacture  of  Milling 
Machines.  The  design  of  the  Plain  Machines,  in  the  main 
features,  is  similar  to  that  of  the  Universal  Machines. 
The  distinguishing  features  of  the  Nos.  12  and  13  Plain 
Milling  Machines  are  the  rapidity  with  which  they  can  be 
operated  ;  and  their  convenience  for  setting  and  removing 
the  work.  They  are  also  unusually  stiff  for  their  size  and 
weight. 

We  are  constantly  endeavoring  to  improve  the  ma- 
chines, and  from  time  to  time  modify  the  details,  and  for 
this  reason  we  suggest  that  our  catalogue  be  frequently 
consulted,  as  all  changes  are  there  most  speedily  brought 
to  the  attention  of  the  public. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


FORMED  CUTTER. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  115 


CARE  AND  USE  OF  MILLING  MACHINES. 


The  Machines  should  be  placed  upon  a  level,  and  if 
possible,  a  solid  floor  or  foundation.  The  Universal  and 
several  of  the  Plain  Machines  should  not  be  set  where 
the  screw  which  raises  and  lowers  the  knee  will  come 
directly  over  a  beam  ;  for  there  must  be  room  for  this 
screw  below  the  base  of  the  machine  in  order  that  the 
knee  may  reach  its  lowest  position. 

The    counter-shafts    are    generally    placed    over    the 

j     r  Counter- 

machines,  but  if  necessary  the  position  of  the  cone  and     shafts. 

other  pulleys  may  be  changed. 

The  shippers  are  most  convenient  when  on  the  left 
side  of  the  machines. 

To    find  the   diameter   of   pulley  required   to  run  the    Diameter 

J  Pulley  on 

counter-shaft    at   a    given    speed  :  multiply  the  speed  of  Main  Line 
counter-shaft  by  the    diameter    of   pulley    on  the   same, 
and  divide  the  product  by  the  speed  of  main,  or  driving 
shaft. 

It    is  sometimes  best  to  vary  the   speed   of    counter-    Speed  of 
shafts  from   those  given   in  our  catalogue.     In   our  own     shafts, 
works  some  counter-shafts   belonging  to  No.  i  Universal 
Milling  Machines  are   run   at   only  90  turns   per   minute, 
while  others  are  run  at  150  turns  per  minute. 

As  the  life  and  efficiency  of  machines  depend'  largely 
upon  the  amount  of  care  bestowed  upon  them,  it  is 
important  that  they  should  be  kept  clean  and  well  oiled, 
and  that  all  repairs  should  be  promptly  made. 

A  coal  or  mineral  oil  called  No.  2  cosmoline,  we  have  oning. 
found  to  be  excellent  for  lubricating.  In  oiling  the  Uni- 
versal Milling  Machines  the  screw  in  the  table  should  be 
replaced  to  keep  the  dirt  out  of  the  clutch  gear  bearings 
and  the  feed  screw.  These  are  oiled  through  the  table 
oil  hole  where  the  lines  on  the  table  and  bed  match. 
Several  oil  holes  are  marked  and  have  threaded  stops. 


n6 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  117 

The  back  gear  of  the  No.  4,  No.  3  prior  to  1893, 
Universal  Milling  Machine  is  oiled  through  the  screw 
hole  W,  Fig.  17,  and  enough  oil  is  held  in  the  quill  to 
last  for  several  months.  There  are  two  other  oil  holes  in 
the  cone  of  this  machine. 

The  greatest  care  should  be  taken  that  chips  do  not 
get  into  the  holes  in  the  spindles  or  between  the  arbor 
collars.  Chips  should  also  be  kept  from  between  the 
knee  and  frame. 

In  placing  the  tools  belonging  to  the  Universal  Milling 
Machines  in  the  closets,  the  following  method  is  con- 
venient:  Put  the  wrenches,  centre  keys,  collet  and 
spanner  upon  the  top  shelf;  the  chuck,  centre  rest  and 
raising  block  upon  the  second  shelf  from  the  top;  the 
change  gears  and  index  plates  in  the  wooden  compart- 
ment, and  the  vise  and  its  clamps  upon  the  bottom  shelf. 
When  the  hand  wheel  is  not  in  use  it  should  hang  on  the 
stud  at  the  side  of  the  machine,  and  when  the  machine 
is  not  in  use  it  is  well  to  bave  the  spiral  head  and  foot- 
stock  on  the  table. 

For  catching  oil  from  the  work  it  is  convenient  to  have  on  Pans, 
two  pans,  one  about  5^  inches  square,  and  the  other 
5^  inches  wide  and  8  inches  long.  The  pans  can  be 
about  i%  inches  deep  and  should  have  a  strainer  near 
the  top.  Cleats  on  the  bottom  of  the  pans  will  keep  them 
from  slipping  off  the  table.  These  pans  are  not  sent  with 
the  machines,  but  may  be  ordered  from  us  if  desired. 

The  construction  of  the- machine  should  be  examined  Adjusting 

en      i      /-  Spindle. 

carefully  before  any  part  is  removed  or  adjusted.  The 
proper  adjustment  will  allow  the  spindle  to  be  easily 
revolved  by  hand.  The  adjustment  of  the  spindles  will 
not  need  to  be  changed  for  a  long  time  after  the  machines 
have  left  our  works. 

The  question  is  often  asked,  How  much  skill  is  re- 
quired to  properly  use  or  operate  milling  machines?  A 
conservative  answer  is  given  in  the  following  editorial 
from  the  American  Machinist : 


u8 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

HILLING  MACHINES  AND  SKILL. 

"  No  one  who  has  had  sufficient  experience  with  the 
milling  machine  in  its  various  forms  to  acquire  a  reason- 
ably clear  idea  of  its  capabilities,  and  who  has  an  oppor- 
tunity to  see  the  machine  in  use  in  the  various  shops,  can 
fail  to  see  that  in  many  of  them  it  is  very  imperfectly 
understood,  and  that,  as  a  consequence,  comparatively 
poor  results  are  obtained  from  its  use — results,  we  mean, 
which  are  very  poor  compared  with  those  which  should  be 
obtained,  and  are  obtained  in  every  case  where  the  legiti- 
mate functions  of  the  machine  are  clearly  recognized, 
and  the  conditions  necessary  to  its  successful  operation 
secured. 

The  milling  machine  intelligently  selected  or  con- 
structed, with  reference  to  the  work  it  is  expected  to  do, 
provided  with  well-designed  and  well-made  special  fix- 
tures, where  the  nature  of  the  work  calls  for  them,  and 
then  skillfully  handled,  is  a  surprisingly  efficient  tool,  but 
used  as  it  is  being  used  in  many  shops  to-day,  it  is  a 
delusion,  a  failure,  and  an  injury  alike  to  the  users,  to 
the  builders,  and  to  the  good  name  of  milling  machines 
generally.. 

While  it  is  true  that  there  is  scarcely  a  machine  tool 
in  use  which  will  yield  more  satisfactory  returns  for  a 
given  outlay,  when  pains  are  taken  to  use  it  in  the  best 
possible  manner,  it  is  also  true,  we  think,  that  there  is 
no  tool  in  common  use,  the  efficiency  of  which  is  so 
much  reduced  by  careless  or  ignorant  handling  and 
abuse.  Considerable  intelligence  and  skill,  as  well  as 
constant  attention,  must  be  bestowed  upon  the  milling 
machines  in  order  to  secure  anything  like  a  satisfactory 
performance  from  them,  either  in  the  quality  of  the  work 
done  or  in  its  quantity. 

In  some  cases  this  skill  and  intelligence  must  be  pos- 
sessed and  exercised  by  the  man  who  actually  handles 
the  machine,  in  other,  cases  by  some  one  who,  though  he 


120 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


BROWN    A    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  121 

does  not  actually  operate  it,  supervises  its  operation, 
and  is  responsible  for  the  work  done  by  it.  But  in  any 
case,  the  skill,  the  intelligence  and  the  careful  attention 
must  be  exercised,  or  the  results  will  be  anything  but 
satisfactory. 

We  hear  a  great  deal  about  the  comparatively  cheap 
labor  required  to  do  milling  machine  work,  and  it  is  evi- 
dent that  too  many  shop  proprietors  have  concluded 
from  this  that  about  all  that  is  necessary  to  do  such 
work  is  to  buy  the  machine,  hire  a  boy  to  run  it,  have 
him  "  shown  how"  for  an  hour  or  so  by  one  of  the  lathe 
hands,  and  then  let  the  boy  and  the  machine  work  out 
their  own  salvation. 

No  greater  mistake  could  possibly  be  made,  and  it  is 
in  such  a  shop  that  a  milling  machine  man  finds  the 
machine  working  often  at  less  than  half  its  capacity, 
with  an  apology  for  a  cutter,  ground  by  hand  in  every 
shape  but  the  right  one,  two  or  three  only  of  its  super- 
abundant teeth  touching  the  work,  and  they,  with  a  dis- 
tinct thump  and  knock,  indicating  anything  but  a  real 
cutting  action,  while  the  boy  stands  by  and  occasionally — 
when  it  occurs  to  him  to  do  so  —  squirting  a  few  drops  of 
black  lubricating  oil  onto  the  chips  with  which  the  spaces 
between  the  teeth  are  tightly  jammed.  The  proprietors 
of  such  shops  are  not  usually  very  enthusiastic  regarding 
the  use  of  milling  machines,  and  it  would  be  a  wonder 
if  they  were. 

Where  a  universal  milling  machine  is  used  upon  tool 
work,  or  for  other  purposes  requiring  a  constant  change 
from  one  job  to  another,  it  is  a  mistake  to  suppose  that 
there  is  economy  in  the  employment  of  a  boy  or  cheap 
man  to  operate  it.  And  many  of  those  who  think  they 
are  saving  money  in  that  way  would  be  greatly  surprised 
to  see  the  work  turned  out  from  such  machines  by  good 
mechanics  who  thoroughly  understand  them,  and  are 
capable  of  earning  good  wages  upon  them. 

Experience  has  proved  that  it  pays  as  well  to  put  first- 
class  mechanics  upon  such  machines  as  upon  any  other 
machine  tools. 


122  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

Where  milling  machines  are  used  for  regular  manufac- 
turing operations,  and  the  same  cycle  of  movements  is  to 
be  repeated  for  a  large  number  of  pieces,  boys,  or  men 
who  are  not  skilled  mechanics,  answer .  every  purpose ; 
but  the  skilled  supervision  must  be  there,  and  it  must  be 
seen  to  that  the  machine  is  as  well  taken  care  of,  the 
cutters  as  well  made  and  ground,  and  in  fact,  everything 
as  well  done  as  though  a  good  mechanic  actually  operated 
the  machines.  In  fact,  in  the  shops  in  which  the  best 
results  are  obtained  from  the  use  of  milling  machines  in 
regular  manufacturing  operations  all  changes  of  the 
machines  from  one  job  to  another,  all  adjustments,  and 
the  grinding  and  replacing  of  cutters  are  done  by,  or,  at 
least,  under  the  direct  supervision  of  a  skilled  mechanic, 
responsible  for  the  work  of  the  machines,  and  who  thor- 
oughly understands  and  appreciates  them.  In  this  way 
only  can  the  full  benefits  of  the  machine  be  realized. 

It  is  far  too  common  to  go  into  the  tool-room  and  find 
a  splendid  universal  milling  machine  standing  idle,  while 
perhaps  two  or  three  men  are  doing  at  the  shaper,  planer 
or  vise,  jobs  which  could  be  done  by  an  expert  milling 
machine  hand,  in  one-fourth  down  to  one-tenth  of  the 
time,  and  a  great  deal  better.  One  fault,  which  is  far 
more  common  than  would  readily  be  believed  in  some 
quarters,  is  a  failure  to  recognize  the  fact  that  a  milling 
machine  necessarily  calls  for  some  sort  of  machine  for 
grinding  cutters,  and  that  a  machine  upon  which  cutters 
are  used,  that  are  ground  by  holding  the  edges  one  after 
the  other  against  an  emery  wheel  by  hand,  is  at  a 
decided  disadvantage,  and  will  do  no  work  which  either 
in  quality  or  cost  will  make  a  favorable  showing  when 
compared  with  that  which  is  done  by  properly  ground 
cutters. 

It  should  be  much  more  generally  recognized  that  in 
milling  machine  practice,  as  in  other  things,  there  is  a 
right  way  and  a  wrong  way,  and  that  skilled,  intelligent 
labor  pays  best.  When  these  facts  are  more  generally 
recognized,  it  will  be  better  for  both  the  builders  and  for 
the  users  of  the  machines." 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO 


FORMED  CUTTERS. 


124  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


CUTTERS  USED  ON  MILLING  M&CHINES. 


The  most  simple  of  the  form  cutters  is  the  fly  cutter 
shown  with  its  holder  in  Fig.  20,  the  cutting  face  as 
shown  by  the  end  view  being  held  about  in  line  with  the 
centre  of  the  holder.  As  these  cutters  have  but  one 
cutting  edge  they  mill  accurately  to  their  own  shape,  but 
of  course  do  not  mill  so  fast,  or  wear  as  long  as  cutters 
with  a  number  of  teeth.  They  can  be  formed  very 
exactly  to  any  desired  shape  at  comparatively  small 
expense,  and  thus  may  be  used  for  many  operations  that 
otherwise  will  not  bear  the  cost  of  special  cutters ; — 
for  example  :  when  one  or  two  small  gears  are  wanted 
in  experimental  work.  Fly  cutters  are  also  of  special 
advantage  in  making  and  duplicating  screw  machine  and 
other  tools  of  irregular  cutting  contour.  The  clearance 
in  tools  thus  made  may  be  obtained  by  holding  the  tool 
blank  in  the  vise  so  that  the  front  end  will  be  elevated 
several  degrees. 
Formed  As  used  by  us  the  term  "  Formed  Cutters  "  applies  to 

Mills  or  J 

Formed    the  cutters  with  teeth  so  relieved  that  they  can  be  sharp- 
Cutters  * 

ened  by  grinding  without  changing  their  form,  while 
"  Form  Cutter  "  can  be  applied  to  any  cutter  cutting  a 
form,  regardless  of  the  manner  in  which  the  teeth  may 
be  relieved.  Fig.  25  represents  a  formed  cutter,  Fig.  26 
a  form  cutter. 

Single  formed  mills,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2 1 ,  are  not  uncom- 
monly made  in  one  piece  7  inches  diameter  or  6  inches 
long.  When  the  width  of  the  cut  is  greater  than  can  be 
easily  made  by  one  cutter  several  cutters  are  .combined  in 
a  gang  as  in  Fig.  25.  A  gang  is  limited  in  length  only 
by  the  capacity  and  power  of  the  milling  machine. 

Many  users  of  Milling  Machines  are  not  fully  aware 
of  the  variety  of  Cutters  that  are  made  and  carried  in 
stock. 


BROWN  &  SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


OF    THK 

UNIVElisiTY 


-5 


FIG.    21. 


126 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


Milling  Cutter. 


Left  Hand  End  Mill. 


End  Mill  with  Centre  Cut. 


Screw  Slotting  Cutter. 


Metal  Slitting  Saw. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


127 


Side  Milling  Cutter  with  Inserted  Teeth. 


Involute  Gear  Cutter. 


^  TllP* 

HF 

Angular  Cutter. 


Epicycloidal  Gear  Cutter. 


Stocking  Cutter. 


128 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


SIDE  MILLING  CUTTER. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


129 


We  now  manufacture  twenty-six  varieties  and  ten  hun- 
dred and  thirty-eight  sizes  of  stock  cutters,  and  we  can 
make  any  size  or  shape,  or  arrange  for  any  combination 
of  cutters  that  may  be  desired.  The  formed  cutters  can 
be  sharpened  by  grinding  without  changing  their  outline. 

On  this  page  we  give  outline  cuts  showing  the  forms 
cut  by  the  respective  cutters,  and  on  other  pages  we  give 
full  page  cuts  of  stock  and  special  cutters. 


Tap  and  Reamer  Cutters. 


Four  Lipped  Twist 
Drill  Cutter. 


Tap  Cutter. 


Reamer  Cutter. 


It  is  well  to  have  mills  or  cutters  as  small  in  diameter 
as  the  work  or  their  strength  will  admit.  The  reason  is 
shown  by  Fig.  22.  Suppose  the  piece  I  D  C  J  E  is  to 
be  cut  from  I  J  to  D  E.  If  the  large  mill  A  is  used,  it 
will  strike  the  piece  first  at  I  when  its  centre  is  at  K,  and 
will  finish  its  cut  when  the  centre  is  at  M.  The  line  G 
shows  how  far  the  mill  must  travel  to  cut  off  the  stock 


Diameter 
of  Mills. 


130 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


GEAR  CUTTERS. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  131 

I  J  D  E.  If  the  small  mill  B  is  used,  however,  it  travels 
only  the  length  of  the  line  H.  It  can  also  be  seen  that 
a  tooth  of  B  travels  through  a  shorter  distance  between 
the  lines  D  E  and  I  J  than  a  tooth  of  A.  This  is  true  of 
all  ordinary  work,  or  where  the  depth  of  cut  I  D  is  not 
more  than  half  the  diameter  of  the  small  mill. 

The  advantage  of  small  mills  has  been  illustrated  in 
our  own  works,  where  a  difference  of  }4  an  inch  in  the 
mills  has  made  a  difference  of  ic%  in  the  cost  of  the 
work. 

In  short,  small  mills  do  more  and  better  work,  cut 
more  easily,  keep  sharp  longer  and  cost  less  than  large 
mills. 

When  it  is  possible  the  mill  should  be  wider  than  the  Length  of 
work,  and  the  hole  in  a  mill  should  be  as  small  as  the  Diameter 
strength  of  the  arbor  will  admit.  The  stock  around  the  °  Mnis.m 
hole,  however,  should  not  be  less  than  ^  of  an  inch  thick. 

A  mill   is  not  necessarily  too  soft  because  it  can  be  Temper  of 
scratched  with  a  file,  for  sometimes  when  cutters  are  too 
hard  or  brittle  and  trouble  is  caused  by  pieces  breaking 
out  of  the  teeth  they  can  be  made  to  stand  well  and  do 
good  work  by  starting  the  temper. 

Of  late  years  mills  have  been  made  with  coarser  teeth  Number  of 
than  formerly,  the  advantages  being  more  room  for  the     Mills? 
chips  and  less  friction  between  the  teeth  and  the  work. 
When    the   teeth    are    so    fine    that   the    mill    drags,    or 
the  stock  is  powdered  the  mill  heats  quickly    and  does 
not  cut  freely. 

The  friction  may  also  be  reduced,  especially  in  large 
mills  taking  heavy  cuts,  by  nicking  or  cutting  away  parts 
of  the  teeth,  which  breaks  the  chips  and  allows  heavier 
cuts  and  feeds  to  be  taken. 

Knowing  the  conditions  under  which  a  mill  is  to  be 
used  in  our  own  practice,  we  modify  the  number  of  teeth 
as  seems  expedient,  usually  making  the  special  mills 
coarser  in  pitch  than  the  stock  mills,  for  our  observation 
indicates  there  are  more  mills  with  too  many  teeth  than 
with  too  few.  But  sometimes  we  relatively  increase  the 


BROWN  &  SHARPL  MFG.  CO. 


FIG. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  133 

number  of  teeth,  as  for  instance,  large  mills,  in  some  cases, 
'can  advantageously  be  designed  to  have  more  than  one 
tooth  cutting  all  the  time  on  broad  surfaces  and  in  deep 
cuts. 

In  England  cutters  generally  have  finer  teeth  than  in 
America,  the  pitch  being  about  two-thirds  as  much  as 
ours,  as  shown  by  the  rules  given  at  a  meeting  of  the 
Institution  of  Mechanical  Engineers  in  London,  October 
30,  i&go.  These  rules  we  are  permitted  to  print  by  the 
courtesy  of  the  gentlemen  who  presented  them  at  the 
meeting. 

Mr.  Geo.  Addy,  of  Sheffield,  estimates  the  pitch  of 
teeth  of  cutters  from  4  inches  to  1 5  inches  diameter  by  the 
following  rule  : 

Pitch  ininches=-\/  (diameter  in  inches  X  8)  X  0.0625. 
Mr.  J.  Macfarlane  Gray  pointed  out  that  this  rule  might 
be  put  into  a  somewhat  simpler  form  for  more  convenient 
use  as  a  plain  workshop  rule,  by  saying  that  the  product 
of  the  pitch  in  inches  multiplied  by  the  pitch  in  thirty- 
seconds  of  an  inch  was  'equal  to  the  diameter  in  inches,  and 
that  a  still  more  simple  way  of  stating  what  was  substan- 
tially the  same  rule  was  to  say  that  the  number  of  teeth  in 
a  milling  cutter  ought  to  be  one  hundred  times  the  pitch 
in  inches  ;  that  is,  if  there  were  27  teeth,  the  pitch  ought 
to  be  0.27  inch. 

In  regard  to  the  cutting  angle  of  the  teeth  we  in  Cutting 
theory  agree  with  what  Mr.  Addy  stated  in  the  paper  ATteth°f 
before  referred  to,  viz.  :  "  The  adoption  of  the  most  suit- 
able cutting  angle  should  receive  the  same  close  attention 
that  is  now  universally  bestowed  upon  the  ordinary  tools 
for  turning  and  planing."  But  in  practice  while  in  many 
instances  adopting  the  angle  according  to  the  material  to 
be  used,  yet  taking  into  consideration  all  the  conditions  of 
using  and  caring  for  the  cutters,  we  have  generally  found 
it  satisfactory  to  have  the  cutting  edges  of  the  teeth  radial. 
As  a  result  of  considerable  research  and  experience  Mr. 
Addy  gives  as  his  opinion  that  the  front  of  the  teeth 
instead  of  being  truly  radial  should  have  a  backward 


134  BROWN    A    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

inclination  of  10  degrees  from  the  radius,  the  cutting  angle 
in  this  way  being  70  degrees  and  the  clearance  angle   10 
degrees. 
cl/?J?i?ce       The  relief  or  clearance  of  mills  we  think  should  usually 

of  Mills.  * 

be  about  three  degrees,  and  the  land  at  the  top  of  the 
teeth  from  .02  inches  to  .04  inches  wide  before  the  clear- 
ance is  cut  or  ground. 

On  cotter  mills,  page  135,  the  clearance  should  be  at  the 
outside  of  the  two  teeth,  as  the  cutting  is  not  done  directly 
upon  the  end ;  but  this  clearance  should  usually  be  only 
about  one-quarter  of  that  on  other  mills. 

Mills  to  cut  grooves  should  be  hollowing  about  five  one- 
hundreths  in  one  inch  for  clearance,  that  is,  a  grooving 
mill  should  be  about  one  one-hundreth  of  an  inch  thinner  at 
one  inch  from  its  edge  or  circumference  than  it  is  at  the 
edge.  Our  grooving  mills  are  given  a  limit  of  two  one- 
thousandths  in  thickness.  Mills  made  to  exact  thickness 
are  very  expensive.  In  cutting  grooves  that  are  to  have 
some  parts  of  their  sides  nearly  or  quite  parallel,  it  is  well 
to  leave  considerable  stock,  for  the  finishing  cut,  as  mills 
like  taps  do  better  work  when  they  can  get  well  into  the 
stock. 

For  the  same  reason  if  the  sides  have  to  be  left  slant- 
ing before  the  finishing  cut  is  taken,  no  part  of  either  side 
should  slant  less  than  three  degrees,  or  about  one  -£$  of 
an  inch  in  each  inch. 

Clearance  in  a  fly  cutter  is  obtained  by  moving  the 
cutter  towards  a,  Fig.  20. 

sketches  A  sketch  of  a  mill  with  a  solid  shank,  or  of  a  formed 
of  Mills.  cutter  that  has  half  of  its  outline  unlike  the  other  half, 
should  clearly  show  which  way  the  mill  is  to  turn.  This 
can  be  done  by  an  arrow,  as  shown  on  page  135,  or  by 
writing  the  word  "  coming  "  either  at  the  top  or  bottom  of 
the  sketch,  as  the  case  may  be.  This  cut  also  shows  how 
the  terms  right  and  left  are  applied  to  angular  cutters  and 
mills.  It  is  well  to  show  the  work  in  red  lines  in  the 
position  that  it  will  occupy  when  cut  by  the  mill. 


BROWN  &  SHAKPE  MFG.  CO. 


135 


COTTER    MILL. 


L.  H.  THREAD. 


R.  II.  THREAD. 


COMING 

LEFT  HAND         EIGHT  HAND 


GOING 

EIGHT  HAND       LEFT  HAND 


ANGULAR    CUTTERS. 


COMING        SAME  AS  TOR  B.  &  S. 


LEFT  HAND  MILLING  MCH. 


G  OING  SAME  DIRECTION  AS  A 

RIGHT  HAND  TWIST  DRILL. 


END    MILLS. 


I36  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

Templets.  jn  ordering  formed  cutters  it  is  well  to  send  templets  of 
the  desired  shapes,  and  to  state  how  nearly  exact  the  cut- 
ters must  be.  If  any  part  of  the  outline  is  to  be  a  straight 
line  the  sketch  should  clearly  show  this,  and  if  any  part  is 
to  be  circular  the  radius  should  be  given.  Unless  instruc- 
tions have  been  given  to  the  contrary,  mills  are  generally 
made  and  hardened  to  cut  steel  or  iron. 

Sharpening  A  dull  mill  wears  away  rapidly  and  does  poor  work. 
Accordingly  care  must  be  taken  to  keep  mills  sharp.  In 
sharpening  them  it  is  necessary  to  be  very  careful  that  the 
temper  should  not  be  drawn. 

Grade  ot        The  emery  wheel  should  be  of  the  proper  grade  as  to 
wheel     hardness  and  as  to  the  size  of  the  emery.     The  wheel 

required  for 

the  work,  should  be  soft  enough  so  that  it  can  be  easily  scratched 
with  a  pocket  knife  blade,  and  the  emery  should  not  be 
finer  than  90  nor  coarser  than  60.  As  a  rule,  the  coarser 
and  softer  the  wheel,  the  faster  it  should  run,  although  the 
periphery  speed  should  not  exceed  5000  feet  per  minute, 
width  of  A  wheel  of  the  proper  grade  should  be  used  with  the 
wheel,  face  not  to  exceed  ^  "  wide.  If  the  wheel  glazes,  the 
temper  of  the  cutter  will  be  drawn.  In  such  a  case,  if  the 
wheel  is  not  altogether  too  hard,  it  can  sometimes  be  rem- 
edied by  reducing  the  face  of  the  wheel  to  about  yk"  or 
by  reducing  the  speed,  or  by  both. 

Before  using,  a  wheel  should  be  turned  off  so  that  it  will 
run  true.  A  wheel  that  glazes  immediately  after  it  has 
been  turned  off  can  sometimes  be  corrected  by  loosen- 
ing the  nut  and  allowing  the  wheel  to  assume  a  slightly 
different  position  when  it  is  again  tightened. 

Another  method  of  preventing  a  wheel's  glazing  is  to 
use  a  piece  of  emery  wheel,  a  few  grades  harder  than  the 
wheel  in  use,  on  the  face  of  the  wheel,  whereby  the  cut- 
ting surface  of  the  wheel  is  made  more  open  and  less  apt 
to  glaze. 

Take  light  cuts  and  move  the  cutter  rapidly  across  the 
face  of  the  wheel.  In  one  of  our  circulars  is  published  a 
list  of  wheels  and  speeds  suitable  for  tool  grinding 
machines. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  137 

Mills  that  have  their  teeth  ground  for  clearance  are 
particularly  apt  to  have  their  temper  drawn  in  sharpening, 
especially  at  the  edge  of  the  teeth,  and  often  when  the 
temper  has  been  drawn  and  the  teeth  are  polished,  they 
will  look  as  usual  after  being  ground. 

In  sharpening  angular  cutters  on  the  face,  it  is  best  to  sharpening 
leave   the   side  of  the  teeth  crowning  or  a  little  higher    Cutfers.r 
toward  the  centre  or  hole  of  the  cutter  than  towards  the 
point  of  the  teeth. 

Formed   cutters    are    sharpened  by   central   or   radial  sharpening 

J  Formed 

grinding  upon  the  front  of  the  teeth,  square  across  the  cut-  Cutters, 
ter  or  in  line  with  the  axis,  for  if  the  teeth  are  not  ground 
radially,  the  work  done  by  them  will  *not  be  of  the  correct 
shape.  The  tendency,  however,  in  grinding  these  mills  is 
to  take  away  too  much  from  the  outer  part  of  the  front  of 
the  teeth.  An  attachment  for  grinding  formed  cutters  is 
made  for  our  No.  3  Universal  Cutter  and  Reamer  Grinder. 

The  best  plan  is  to  have  all  mills  sharpened  immediately 
after  they  have  been  used,  before  they  are  put  away. 

The  advantage  of  properly  sharpening  cutters  is  indi- 
cated by  the  amount  of  work  done  by  the  gear  cutter 
shown  on  page  138.  This  cutter  was,  when  new,  the  same 
in  appearance  as  the  gear  cutters  shown  on  page  127,  and 
it  has  cut  467,  4  pitch,  64  teeth,  3-inch  face  cast  iron 
gears, — making  a  total  length  of  cut  of  7472  feet.  The 
teeth  of  the  gears  were  cut  from  solid  blanks  and  finished 
in  one  cut.  This  record  while  good  is  not  exceptional. 


^ 

O] 

TJNIVI  ,: 

238- 

^^  CALM 


BROWN  &  SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


GEAR    CUTTER  WORN. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


Tsf-  '-'B.'MaX 

OK    T»^-  \ 

t  uNivtt^ir?  )) 

-        J 

-•uv^r 


140  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


USE  OF  MILLING   MACHINES, 

EXAMPLES  OF  OPERATIONS. 


Uin°th0il  Oil  is  used  in  milling  to  obtain  smoother  work,  to  make 
Cwork°r  tne  m^s  *ast  l°nger»  and,  where  the  nature  of  the  work 
requires,  to  wash  the  chips  from  the  work  or  from  the 
teeth  of  the  cutters.  It  is  generally  used  in  milling  a 
large  number  of  pieces  of  steel,  wrought  iron,  malleable 
iron  or  tough  bronze.  When  only  a  few  pieces  are  to  be 
milled  it  frequently  is  not  used,  and  some  steel  castings  are 
milled  without  oil ;  also  in  cutting  cast  iron  it  is  not  used. 
For  light,  flat  cuts  it  is  put  on  the  cutter  with  a  brush,  giv- 
ing the  work  a  thin  covering  like  a  varnish  ;  for  heavy 
cuts  it  should  be  led  to  the  mill  from  the  drip  can,  sent 
with  each  machine,  or  it  should  be  pumped  upon  or  across 
the  mill  in  cutting  deep  grooves,  in  milling  several  grooves 
at  one  time,  or  indeed,  in  milling  any  work  where,  if  the 
chips  should  stick,  they  might  catch  between  the  teeth  and 
sides  of  the  groove  and  scratch  or  bend  the  work. 

Generally  we  use  lard  oil  in  milling,  but  any  animal  or 
fish  oils  may  be  used.  The  oil  may  be  separated  from 
the  chips  by  a  centrifugal  separator,  or  by  the  wet  process, 
so  that  a  large  amount  may  be  used  with  but  little  waste. 

Some  manufacturers  prefer  to  mix  mineral  oil  with  lard 
or  fish  oil,  and  state  the  mixture  is  less  expensive  and 
works  well.  Prof.  J.  E.  Denton  has  made  experiments 
with  mixtures  and  thinks  that  mineral  or  coal  oil  can  be 
advantageously  used. 

An  excellent  lubricant  to  use  with  a  pump  is  by  mixing 
together  and  boiling  for  one-half  hour,  ^  pound  Sal  Soda, 
Y-2.  pint  Lard  Oil,  >^  pint  Soft  Soap  and  water  enough  to 
make  10  quarts. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO.  141 

There  is  a  difference  of  opinion  as  to  whether  the  work 
should  be  moved  against  the  cutter  as  at  A,  Fig.  23,  or 
with  it  as  at  B.  But  in  most  cases  our  experience  and 
experiments  show  it  is  best  for  the  work  to  move  against 
the  mill  as  shown  at  A,  Fig.  23. 

When  it  moves  in  this  way  the  teeth   of  the  cutter,  in  ^w^ich 
commencing  their  work,  as  soon  as  the  hard  surface  or  ^^  jfn 
scale  is  once  broken,  are  immediately  brought  in  contact  der  a  Mill« 
with  the  softer  metal,  and  when  the  scale  is  reached  it  is 
pried  or  broken  off.     Also  when  a  piece  moves  in  this  way, 
the  cutter   cannot  dig  into  the  work  as  it  is  liable  to  do 
when   the    bed    is  moved    in  the    direction  indicated  at 
B.     When  a  piece  is  on  the  side  of  a  cutter  that  is  mov- 
ing downwards,  the  piece  should,  as  a  rule,  have  a  rigid 
support  and  be  fed  by  raising  the  knee  of  the  machine. 

Some  work,  however,  is  better  milled  by  moving  with 
the  cutter.  For  example  :  To  dress  both  sides  of  a  thick 
piece  D  with  a  pair  of  large  straddle  mills,  it  might  be  well 
to  move  the  piece  towards  the  left,  as  the  mills  then  tend 
to  keep  it  down  in  place  instead  of  lifting  it. 

Again  in  milling  deep  slots,  or  in  cutting  off  stock,  with 
a  thin  cutter  or  saw,  it  may  be  better  to  move  the  work 
with  the  cutter,  as  the  cutter  is  then  less  likely  to  crowd 
side-wise  and  make  a  crooked  slot. 

When  the  work  is  moving  with  the  cutter,  the  table  gib 
screws  must  be  set  up  rather  hard,  for  if  the  work  moves 
too  easily  the  cutter  may  catch  and  the  cutter  or  work  be 
injured.  A  counter  weight  to  holdback  the  table  is  excel- 
lent in  such  milling. 

For  the  purpose  of  making  a  comparative  test  of  the  two    Experi- 
ments to 
methods,  we  made  the  following  four  experiments  on  our  test  method 

No.  5  Plain  Milling  Machine  :  °  cSfter?S 

This  machine  had  been  provided  with  a  take-up  attach- 
ment for  back-lash  of  table,  two  cutters  of  same  diameter 
and  width  were  used,  and  suitable  castings  were  provided, 
same  being  3"  square  and  3  ft.  long  (pickled). 

First  experiment  with  No.  i  Cutter  was  with  the  cut, 
cutting  down  on  scale  and  feeding  6"  per  minute.  After 


142  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

cutting  one  surface  3  feet  long,  the  cutter  was  found  to  be 
dull. 

Second  experiment  with  No,  2  Cutter  was  against  the 
cut,  cutting  under  the  scale  and  feeding  6"  per  minute. 
Eight  castings  3  feet  long  were  milled  before  the  cutter 
had  shown  the  wear  of  No.  i. 

In  order  to  prove  the  tempering  of  the  Cutters  both 
were  re-ground. 

Third  experiment  was  with  No.  i  Cutter  working  in  same 
manner  that  No.  2  Cutter  had  been,  viz.  :  against  the  cut, 
under  the  scale  and  feeding  6"  per  minute.  Eleven  cast- 
ings 3  feet  long  were  milled  before  the  Cutter  had  shown 
the  wear  of  No.  2 . 

Fourth  experiment  was  with  No.  2  Cutter  working  in  the 
same  manner  as  No.  i,  as  described  in  first  experiment. 
This  Cutter  failed  on  the  first  cut. 

Speed  of  It  is  impossible  to  give  definite  rules  for  the  speed  and 
feed  of  Cutters,  and  what  is  here  said  is  only  in  the  way 
of  suggestions.  Sometimes  the  speed  must  be  reduced, 
and  yet  the  feed  need  not  be  changed.  The  judgment  of 
the  foreman  or  man  in  charge  of  the  machine  should 
determine  what  is  best  in  each  instance. 
Average  The  average  speed  on  wrought  iron  and  annealed  steel 

Speed.  .  ..... 

is  perhaps  forty  feet  a  minute,  which  gives  about  sixty 
turns  a  minute  for  Cutters  2  y2  inches  diameter.  The  feed 
of  the  work  for  this  surface  speed  of  the  Cutter  can  be 
about  i  y%  inches  a  minute,  and  the  depth  of  cut  say  T^  of 
an  inch.  In  cast  iron  a  Cutter  can  have  a  surface  speed 
of  about  fifty  feet  a  minute  while  the  feed  is  i  ^  inches  a 
minute  and  the  cut  T3^-  of  an  inch  deep,  and  in  tough  brass 
the  speed  may  be  eighty  feet,  the  feed  as  before  and  the 
chip  •£%  of  an  inch. 

As  a  small  Cutter  cuts  faster  than  a  large  one,  an  end 
mill  for  example,  ^  inch  diameter  can  be  run  about  400 
revolutions  with  a  feed  of  4  inches  a  minute. 

For  examples  of  what  may  regularly  be  done  under 
suitable  conditions,  we  may  mention  that  Cutters  2^ 
inches  in  diameter  used  in  cutting  annealed  cast  iron  in 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  143 

our  works  are  run  at  more  than  200  turns,  or  at  a  surface 
speed  of  more  than  125  feet,  while  the  work  is  fed  more 
than  eight  inches  a  minute.  The  cuts  are  light,  not  more 
than  -j1^  of  an  inch  deep,  and  the  work  is  short,  from  % 
inch  to  i  inch  long.  Two  side  mills  5  inches  in  diameter 
running  50  turns  a  minute,  dress  both  edges  of  cast  iron 
bars  Y^  of  an  inch  thick,  with  a  feed  of  more  than  4 
inches  a  minute. 

An  English  authority,  Mr,  Geo.  Addy,  gives  as  safe 
speeds  for  cutters  of  6  inches  diameter  and  upwards  : 

Steel,         •          36  ft.  per  minute  with  a  feed  of  •£"  per  minute. 
Wrought  Iron,  48  "  "         i" 

Cast  Iron,  60  "  "  "  "          if" 

Brass,  120  "  "  "  "         2f"  " 

And  he  gives  as  a  simple  rule  for  obtaining  the  speed  : — 
Number  of  revolutions  which  the  cutter  spindle  should 
make  when  working  on  cast  iron  =240  divided  by  the 
diameter  of  the  cutter  in  inches. 

Mr.  John  H.  Briggs,  another  English  authority,  states, 
"  for  cutting  wrought  iron  with  a  milling  cutter  taking  a 
cut  of  one  inch  depth  —  which  was  a  different  thing  from 
mere  surface  cutting  —  a  circumferential  speed  of  from  36 
to  40  feet  per  minute  was  the  highest  that  could  be  attained 
with  due  consideration  to  economy,  and  to  the  time  occu- 
pied in  grinding  and  changing  cutters  ;  the  feed  would  be 
at  the  rate  of  S/s  inch  per  minute.  Upon  soft  mild  steel, 
about  30  feet  per  minute  was  the  highest  speed,  with  % 
inch  depth  of  cut  and  fy  inch  feed  per  minute.  Upon 
tough  gun-metal,  80  feet  per  minute,  with  ^  inch  depth 
of  cut  and  ^  inch  feed.  For  cutting  cast  iron  geared 
wheels  from  blanks  previously  turned,  and  using  in  this 
case  comparatively  small  milling  cutters  of  only  3^  inches 
diameter,  the  speed  was  26^  feet  per  minute,  with  % 
inch  depth  of  cut  and  ^  incn  fee^  Per  minute." 

Slotting  cutters  may  often  be  run  at  a  higher  speed 
than  other  cutters  of  the  same  diameter,  but  with  a  wider 
face.  Angular  cutters  must  in  some  instances  be  used 


144  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

with  a   fine  feed  to  prevent  breaking  the  points  of  the 
teeth. 

The  following  table  may  be  of  service  as  suggesting 
speeds  that  may  be  tried  with  our  machines  on  ordinary 
work,  but  it  is  not  published  as  an  absolute  guide,  and  as 
before  stated,  the  judgment  of  the  foreman  must  deter- 
mine what  is  best  in  each  instance.  In  considering  the 
table  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  rapid  progress  is  being 
made  in  milling,  and  that  all  figures  are  submitted  with  the 
certainty  that  improvements  in  machines,  cutters  and  fix- 
tures will  soon  render  them  obsolete. 

Limits  in  An  ordinary  limit  is  four  one-thousandths  of  an  inch. 
This  is  allowable  for  bolt  heads,  nuts,  and  the  squares 
at  the  ends  of  shafts  where  cranks  or  hand  wheels  are 
used,  also  for  some  kinds  of  gibs  and  many  parts  that  are 
milled  for  a  finish. 

In  most  sewing  machine  pieces,  electrical  and  scientific 
instruments,  type  writers  and  fine  machinery,  the  limit  is 
two  one  thousandths.  Thus  a  slot  that  is  called  half  an 
inch  wide  may  be  any  size  between  half  an  inch  and  five 
hundred  and  two  one  thousandths  of  an  inch  (.500"  to 
.502")  while  the  tongue  or  piece  that  goes  into  the  half 
inch  slot  may  be  of  any  size  between  two  one-thousandths 
less  than  one  half  inch  and  one-half  inch  (498"  to  500"). 
On  many  pieces,  for  instance  usually  on  those  milled  for  a 
finish,  the  limit  may  of  course  be  either  above  or  below 
the  standard  size. 

Some  work  should  be  milled  as  close  as  possible  to  exact 
size  ;  and  when  close  fits  are  required  it  is  often  cheaper 
and  better  to  do  the  fitting  by  the  milling  machine  than  by 
filing  or  other  hand  work. 

The  most  accurate  results  in  milling  to  a  given  thickness 
or  size  are  ordinarily  obtained  by  straddle  mills  or  side 
milling  cutters  ;  for  when  only  one  side  is  milled  at  a  time 
and  the  piece  has  to  be  changed  from  side  to  side,  it  is 
hardly  practicable  to  work  to  a  smaller  limit  than  two  one- 
thousandths  of  an  inch.  Side  milling  frequently  requires 
more  attention  to  keep  the  work  smooth  than  ordinary  sur- 


BROWN   &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


Ed 
H 

^«4-l 

... 

- 

^ 

g 

SI- 

2 

•; 

CO 

^ 

- 

2 

'- 

3 

co 

a 

'S    - 

^, 

01 

00 

-. 

* 

a 

S3       CO 

CO 

CO 

co 

CO 

03 

1—1 

•H 

CO 

*•* 

- 

CO 

2 

J 

a 

5 

^ 

3 

W 

P 

co 

0  5 

rH 

<-• 

-< 

33 

03 

a 

,3 

- 

* 

3 

O 

« 

°      0 

^ 

Oi 

„ 

eo 

- 

s 

~ 

e» 

^ 

* 

- 

t^ 

^ 

'- 

~ 

t>* 

O 

"8 

1 

CO 

Cutter  pr. 
Minute. 

» 

. 

. 

a 

. 

. 

MILLINC 

t— 

CO 

CO 

CO 

CO 

» 

Jo 

' 

^ 

8 

58 

D 

V 

"      1 

0 

0 

« 

<= 

. 

O 

0 

•c 

0 

tt 

w 

e 

'- 

s 

03 

34  i 

s 

* 

03 

0 

5 

ci 

5 

o     1 

fc 

t- 

lev. 

< 

r- 

n 

T 

k 

•• 

CO 

< 

3 

T- 

f 

H 

<*-  c 

^ 

f 

oo 

•f 

2 

ej 

?) 

i 

SJJ 

00 

O 

- 

* 

- 

eo 

- 

1-1 

•0 

CO 

*"* 

FEED  PEF 

^00 

1 

CO 

- 

oo 

CO 

oo 

. 

» 

00 

so 

M 

eo 

3 

co 

to 

2 

eo 

M 

CO 

00 

O 

ct 

1 

«M           -^ 

0         3 

= 

N 

00 

X) 

CO 

CO 

1 

«o 

10 

. 

* 

O 

O 
03 

^3 

^ 

O 

p—  i 

g» 

«      0 

g 

H 

CO 

ft 

1-1 

J 

1-1 

U 

— 
O 

« 

*•*        3 

O 

O 

O 

s 

a 

0 

s 

fc 

'.r 

fc 

. 

. 

CJ 

N 

-J 

M 

lO 

s, 

CO 

g  i 

2 

1 

« 

4>         3 

».    .£ 

i 

1 

5 

s 

O 

3 

Ca 

CO 

0 

$ 

* 

s 

(0 

o 

O 
CO 

O 

M 

IS 

• 

s 

s 

s 

i 

5 

«w      Ej« 
°      g 

- 

|CM 

h 

H«> 

cc 

^ 

K 

•mm 

( 

0 

T- 

r 

u; 

> 

146 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.     CO. 


a 
a 

i  MINUTE. 

|S 

PH 

^; 

"9 
<o 

g 

oo 

30 

w 

, 

- 

00 
0 

•M 

0) 

- 

00 

2 

<o 

c>r 

" 

r. 

O 

S 

CO 

ft' 

- 

s 

H 

FEKDPKI 

0> 
g^«2 

2 

X 

CO 

r. 

2 

2 

02 

GO 
OO 

'w 

;? 

°9 
o 

oo 

-i 

=9 

« 

j 

CO 

2 

- 

5 

" 

5 

op 

I 

„ 

s 

5    ^ 

s 

3 

eo 

sd 

5 

a 

gc« 

1-1 

1-1 

-i 

S 

2 

~ 

s 

^ 

X 

o 

H 
fa 

5^- 

1 

ffl 

to 

00 

!C 

8 

o 

.- 

- 

r 

| 

g 

S*°o 

^^ 

SO 

1 

:•: 

*"* 

" 

OJ 

O 

0 

13 

"o  a_o; 

I 

J 

^ 

a 

c, 

-r. 

-1 

^ 

r 

*, 

a 

DC 

w 

1C 

M 

M 

w 

eo 

CO 

70 

ce 

fit 

w 

=0 

CO 

8 

i 

z 

fa 

o 

oJ 

1 

1 

=5 

. 

M 

SURF  AC 

C 

o 

-r 

s 

= 
I 

^ 

^ 

^ 

s 

8 

5? 

ri 

s 

^ 

« 

r-' 

IS 

j 

CL 

s.  -• 

.2  o  = 

-1 

CM 

V 

• 

(0 

T 

I'* 

•• 

C 

) 

^ 
^ 

I 

1 

6 

a 

«°l 

r 

f 

1 

-A 

t 

op 

ao 

op 

op 

2 

-t- 

u. 

2 

^I 

K 

00 

g 

C 

^ 

—  i 

« 

" 

- 

so 

OO 

- 

so 

- 

(N. 

O 
(r\ 

a 

J3  c 

oo 
cc 

5 

«? 

op 

3 

« 

* 

00 

•* 

X) 

X 

00 

Q 

o 

I 

^  2 

00 

s 

" 

- 

IN 

^ 

CO 

00 

^ 

« 

- 

- 

- 

t>< 

^ 

^ 

UJ 

li. 

Q 
Z 

CO 
0 

|«l 

| 

c* 

°9 

S 

oo 

CO 

. 

H 
CO 

•H 

- 

- 

- 

CO 

N 

- 

* 

- 

'_ 

Vj 

0 

~ 

2 

a 

2 

•*"««  « 

1 

CCJ 

» 

00 

-r 

g 

0 

C/) 

Q 

kj 

S 

£°^ 

M 

"* 

"^ 

00 

" 

HH 

W 
CL 
CO 

fa 

OS 

o 

Speed  of 
Cutter  pr. 
Minute. 

0 

i 

§ 

s 

^ 

• 

. 

RFACE  B 

O 

S 

i 

O 

* 

o 

-r 

so 

• 

s 

• 

i 

• 

• 

" 

CO 
C't 

- 

Q 

v-l 

<= 

a 

p 

o 

* 

02 

S 

«-| 

ct 

M 

91 

1C 

•0 

o 

'" 

0 

x 

JO 

re 

80 

M 

:'r 

70 

8 

" 

« 

s  s 

•H 

" 

H 

CO 

CO 

T 

•• 

U) 

C 

) 

1 

^ 

M 

• 

BROWN    &    SHARPE   MFG.    CO. 


147 


0 

*** 

ej 

* 

|3 

CO 

g 

«9 

09 

c. 

3 

g 

x 

2 

i 

£,«  . 

j 

STEEL. 

J 

— 

" 

J 

1 

CO 

H 

eo 

2 

M 

a 

op 

K 

00 
Is. 

-+» 

M 

-f 

« 

I 

- 

3 

cc 
-1-1 

2 

WINERY 

N 

| 

2 

- 

- 

! 

CO 

ACHINEF 

- 

- 

N 

- 

« 

CT 

00 

00 

eo 

0 

0 

0 

0 

O 

^ 

•s 

I 

op 

7-8  each. 

i*s 

5 

* 

s 

N 

eo 

^ 

'^_ 

-c 

(M 

•c 

(N 

c 

oo 

•- 

B 

«e 

•c 

00 

0 

so 

ftS 

o 

c 

„ 

U. 

~ 

" 

~ 

i 

0 

" 

5s 

'S  aaJ 

"C  l.   3 

$sl 

» 

; 

i 

r 

0 

o 

MILLING 

i 

i 

• 

, 

i 

- 

3 

» 

; 

« 

« 

2 

« 

vEYSEAT 

• 

• 

i 

i 

i 

£ 

i 

§ 

> 

. 

URFACE 

; 

rf 

S 

; 

s 

; 

?§ 

. 

'-> 

• 

• 

N 

. 

1! 

. 

. 

5    s 

H 

CM 

v 

•i 

n| 

V 

^ 

mm 

CO 

| 

rc 

i 

- 

C 

CM 

•- 

r 

^ 

t 

« 

&ol 

*! 

* 

oo 

30 

N 

00 

GO 

op 

« 

t 

?, 

N 

op 

t 

v 

x 

f 

x 

SJ| 

1 

1-1 

: 

" 

* 

Z 

00 

« 

X 

- 

00 

: 

0 

» 

CO 

-*< 

•N 

* 

00 

-H 

•2  « 

». 

30 

Of) 

00 

1- 

CO 

oc 

CM 

oo 

GO 

op 

N 

^ 

ffl 

30 

« 

op 

°9 

- 

coy  o 

s-i 

:t 

L'J 

_^ 

° 

*° 

S 

. 

0 

.S 

C  "g1-1 

^ 

-         . 

t 

* 

O 

=? 

s 

~ 

« 

o 

|S5 

TH 

~ 

- 

CO 

ri 

eo 

3 

o 

9) 

3D 

55 

i 

H 

fH 

2 

SC 

2 

/. 

wi 

2 

* 

ILLING  1 

* 

2 

(C 

2 

H 

C 

S 

2 

" 

- 

•H 

op 

1 

OS 
O 

o 

55 

S 

2 

~ 

"o  aaJ 

a 

a 

* 

I|i 

s 

0 

i 

§ 

0 

3 

o 

fa 

PC 

M 

" 

i 

M 

w 

-f 

' 

a 

s 

0 

s 

0 

CO 
[H 

M 

* 

a 

a3 

N 

o 

0 

CO 

~i 

«<*= 

^ 

", 

i  . 

H 

H 

N 

T- 

• 

col 

^" 

<* 

m 

U) 

£ 

C 

0 

-1 

cr 

CM 

) 

T 

^ 

3 

a 

i 

^ 

I" 

148  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

face  milling.     But  very  accurate  milling  may  be  done  and 
excellent  surfaces  obtained  by  small  end  mills  running  at 
high  speeds, 
pickling        Castings  that  are  to  be  milled  should  be  free  from  sand. 

Castings 

and       They  should  be  well  pickled,  and  in  some  cases  it  is  an 

Forgings.  J 

advantage  to  have  them  rattled  after  being  pickled. 
Where  they  are  small  and  are  to  be  finished  rapidly  it  is 
also  well  to  have  them  annealed. 

.  Forgings   should   be   free   from  scale.     They   can   be 
pickled   in   ten   minutes  in  one  part  sulphuric  acid  and 
twenty-five  parts  boiling  water,  and  if  then  rinsed  in  boil- 
ing water  they  will  dry  before  becoming  rusty, 
washers        When  the  collars  sent  with  our  milling  arbors  are  not 

and  Collars 

for  Arbors,  the  right  thickness  to  bring  the  cutters  into  the  desired 
position  washers  are  employed.  The  following  thicknesses 
are  convenient  —  .001",  .002",  .004",  .008",  .016",  and 
.032" — as  these  give  all  steps  from  .001"  to  .032".  The 
collars  usually  sent  are  cast  iron,  but  for  hard  usage  steel 
collars  are  preferable. 

Lead          A  lead  hammer  is  frequently  used  to  drive  arbors  or 
ier*   collets   into  the  spindle  or  bottom  or    seat  work  in  the 
vise. 

A  bar  of  brass  or  copper,  ^  inch  diameter  by  5  or  6 
inches  long,  will  also  be  found  useful  to  place  against  end 
mills,  or  the  end  of  small  collets  after  the  mills  are  in  place. 
In  this  way  the  driving  is  often  more  conveniently  done 
and  any  hammer  may  be  used, 
selection  The  construction  of  the  machine  having  been  carefully 

for  Novice,  examined,  and  the  novice  having  made  himself  familiar 
with  the  various  classes  of  cutters,  it  is  well  if  he  is  using 
a  Universal  Machine,  to  choose  some  work  at  the  outset 
that  does  not  require  the  use  of  the  spiral  head.  Such 
work  is  generally  held  in  the  vise  when  milled. 
Setting  The  vise  can  be  set  with  its  jaws  parallel  to  the  spindle 

Plain  Base,  by  placing  one  of  the  milling  arbors  in  the  spindle  and 
then  bringing  the  jaws  up  to  the  arbor.  It  can  be  set  at 
right  angles  with  the  spindle  by  a  square  placed  against 
the  arbor  and  the  jaws. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  149 

The  front  of  the  table  of  the  machine  can  also  be  used 
in  setting  the  vise. 

The  swivel  vise,  which  is  now  sent  with  all  of  the  Uni- 
versal Milling  Machines  and  Plain  Milling  Machines  with 
Screw  Feed,  can  be  set  by  making  use  of  the  graduations 
on  the  base. 

To  illustrate  the  various  ways  in  which  the  machines  are  Examples 

J  of  Work 

used,  we  have  given  descriptions  and  cuts  of  a  number  of    Done  on 

Milling 

operations.  Many  of  these  cuts  are  made  on  the  No:  i  Machines. 
Universal  Milling  Machine,  but  it  is  obvious  that  the  other 
machines  may  generally  be  adapted  to  similar  work,  and 
the  directions  given  in  connection  with  the  No.  i  Universal 
Milling  Machine  can,  in  most  instances,  be  applied  when 
doing  work  on  the  other  machines. 

Small  stock  may  be  conveniently  and  advantageously  Cug£"£off 
cut  into  short  lengths,  especially  when  it  is  of  a  section  not 
easily  handled  in  a  cutting  off  machine.  The  cutter  com- 
monly used  is  the  metal  slitting  saw,  shown  on  page  126. 
It  is  held  on  an  arbor  as  in  Fig.  23,  and  the  work  is  fed  as 
indicated  by  the  arrow  on  the  piece  A.  The  table  may  be 
fed  by  hand  or  automatically,  the  stop  being  used  to  deter- 
mine the  length  of  feed,  and  the  work  may  be  placed 
exactly  in  the  required  position  by  noting  the  readings  on 
the  graduations  around  the  end  of  the  cross  feed  shaft. 
When  cut  in  a  Milling  Machine  the  pieces  are  square  at 
both  ends  and  uniform  in  length. 

If  it  is  desirable  only  to  square  the  ends  of  small  pieces   Squaring 

J  the  Ends 

and  make  them  uniform  in  length,  it  may  be  done  by  first    of  small 

&  J  /  Pieces. 

squaring  one  end  of  all  the  pieces,  and  then  by  bringing 
the  finished  end  against  a  piece  clamped  to  the  immovable 
vise  jaw  to  serve  as  a  stop,  while  the  other  end  is  brought 
against  the  mill  by  the  cross  feed  and  run  past  it  automati- 
cally or  by  hand,  the  vise  jaws  being  parallel  with  the 
spindle.  In  squaring  up  the  ends,  at  first,  a  face  or  an 
end  mill,  as  shown  on  page  126,  or  possibly  a  side  milling 
cutter,  Fig.  23,  screwed  on  the  end  of  an  arbor  may  be 
used. 


150  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


^'l&  24  snows  two  side  "rills  or  twm  miUs  uPon  an  arbor. 
°ofrenMuIs  They  ordinarily  revolve  in  the  direction  indicated  by  the 
arrow,  and  are  used  in  milling  tongues  or  ribs. 

As  shown  they  are  held  apart  by  a  collar  or  washer,  but 
a  milling  cutter  may  be  put  between  them  and  used  to 
dress  the  top  of  the  tongue  and  five  surfaces  then  be 
milled  at  once. 

The  two  sides  and  bottom  of  bur  Milling  Machine 
Vises,  page  151,  are  milled  on  the  No.  5  Plain  Milling 
Machine,  with  cutters  arranged  in  this  way.  The  length 
of  cut  on  the  No.  2  Vise  is  9^  inches,  width  on  the  top 
5^  inches,  and  the  height  of  the  sides  2^  inches,  mak- 
ing the  total  width  of  cut  10  inches.  The  side  mills 
have  38  teeth  and  are  8  inches  in  diameter,  the  milling 
cutter  has  14  teeth  and  is  2^  inches  in  diameter.  The 
number  of  revolutions  of  the  spindle  is  24  per  minute; 
the  feed  is  4^4  inches  per  minute.  The  time  required  to 
set  and  remove  the  work  and  make  the  cut  is  eight  min- 
utes. The  figures  are  not  given  as  showing  remarkable 
speed,  but  as  indicating  what  may  be  easily  attained  in 
ordinary  work. 

By  a  similar  arrangement  of  cutters  small  rectangular 
pieces  can  be  milled  with  two  cuts,  the  first  across  the  top 
and  sides,  the  second  across  the  bottom  and  ends. 

Cast  iron  pieces  6  inches  wide  and  about  8  inches  long 
are  milled  on  the  sides  and  bottom  on  the  No.  24  Plain 
Milling  Machine,  by  cutters  making  24  revolutions  per 
minute,  with  a  feed  of  2  inches  per  minute.  The  side 
milling  cutters  are  5^6  inches  diameter,  and  the  milling 
cutters  3  inches  diameter.  The  total  width  of  cut  is 
about  8  inches  and  the  depth  T3^  inch.  The  top  is  milled 
by  an  inserted  tooth  mill  6^  inches  diameter,  making  22 
revolutions  per  minute,  with  a  feed  of  2^3  inches. 
Another  cut  is  made  on  the  inside  with  an  inserted  tooth 
mill  4  inches  diameter,  making  36  revolutions  per  minute, 
with  a  feed  of  2^  inches. 

A  guaranteed  cut  in  tool  steel  on  the  No.  4  Plain 
Machine,  which  was  surpassed  in  daily  practice  was  8 


BROWN   &   SHARPE   MFG.  CO. 


FIG.  24. 


MILLING    MACHINE   VISE. 


152  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

inches  wide,  j£  inch  deep,  with  ^  inch  feed  per  minute. 
And  one  of  the  cuts  most  commonly  seen  on  a  No.  23 
Plain  in  our  shops  is  in  cast  iron  9  inches  wide,  ^  inch 
deep,  with  3  inch  feed  and  30  feet  surface  speed  per  minute. 

When  side  cutting  teeth  are  dull,  straddle  mills  may  be 
interchanged,  thus  bringing  sharp  teeth  into  use,  and  if  it 
is  necessary  that  the  distance  D,  Fig.  24,  must  be  kept 
uniform,  the  distance  between  the  cutters  should  be  capa- 
ble of  reduction  to  compensate  for  wear  and  for  the  loss 
caused  by  grinding.  This  reduction  in  the  distance  D,  is 
often  accomplished  by  removing  the  washers  between  the 
cutter  and  steel  washer  as  at  C. 

Combinations  or  gangs  of  form  cutters  work  somewhat 
similar  to  that  indicated  by  Fig.  24  are  shown  in  Figs.  21 
and  25.  These  figures  represent  the  milling  of  opposite 
sides  of  small  steel  pieces,  3  inches  long  and  ^  inch  wide. 

The  vise  jaws  as  shown  are  made  to  fit  the  piece.  This 
is  a  class  of  work  which  is  usually  done  on  the  small  Plain 
Milling  Machines  and  on  which  one  boy  can  run  several 
machines.  A  similar  class  of  work,  made  by  a  combina- 
tion of  two  form  and  one  ordinary  milling  cutter  is  shown 
by  Fig.  26. 

Fig.  27  shows  twin  or  straddle  mills  cutting  a  bolt  head 
or  nut.  When  these  mills  are  not  at  hand  the  work  can 
be  milled  by  a  milling  cutter  as  in  Fig.  28,  or  by  an  end 
mill  as  in  Fig.  29.  In  either  case  when  nuts  are  milled 
they  are  usually  strung  on  a  mandrel. 
Fixtures  For  many  kinds  of  work  the  fixture  shown  in.  Fig.  ^o  is 

for  Small  .  3       . 

Work,  convenient.  It  consists  of  a  square  piece  of  cast  iron 
several  inches  in  length,  bored  to  receive  a  shaft  or  spin- 
dle to  be  split  at  one  end  or  both  ends  as  shown ;  or  to 
have  a  series  of  holes  or  flat  places  made  at  right  angles 
with,  or  directly  opposite  each  other.  The  slot  runs  the 
entire  length  of  the  fixture  and  a  small  screw  is  inserted 
at  S  to  hold  the  work  and  prevent  it  from  turning  while  in 
the  shell. 

The  fixture  is  held  in  the  vise  as  in  Fig.  30,  and  the 
work  does  not  have  to  be  changed  in  the  fixture,  but  after 


BROWN  &  SHARPE   MFG.  CO. 


FIG.  25. 


FIG.   26. 


154  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.     CO. 

each  cut  is  taken,  the  fixture  is  given  one-quarter  of  a 
turn,  and  each  of  the  four  sides  of  the  bolt  head  or  other 
work  brought  to  the  mill. 

If  the  work  to  be  milled  is  three  or  six  sided,  the  fixture 
must  be  six  sided.  With  two  mills  as  in  Fig  27,  the 
fixture  would  have  to  be  changed  in  the  vise  only 
three  times  to  mill  a  six  sided  piece.  A  fixture  can  be 
made  without  the  slot  and  with  a  tapering  hole  for  holding 
the  shanks  of  end  mills,  twist  drills  and  milling  arbors 
while  the  tenons  are  milled. 
Cutting  Two  mills  can  be  put  together  with  the  teeth  interlocked 

Slots.  .  . 

as  in  Fig.  31,  and  used  in  cutting  slots.  The  advantage 
of  this  arrangement  is  that  the  mills  can  be  blocked  apart 
to  keep  the  width  of  the  cut  always  the  same. 

The  end  mill  can  also  be  used  in  cutting  slots,  as  in 
Fig.  32,  the  width  of  the  slot  being  the  same  as  the  diame- 
ter of  the  mill.  Shafts  that  are  to  be  slotted  may  be  held 
in  the  chuck  on  the  spiral  head,  as  shown  in  Fig.  32,  one 
end  of  the  shaft  being  supported  by  the  foot-stock  centre. 
In  this  case  it  is  better  to  feed  the  work  back  and  forth 
the  full  length,  than  to  drill  holes  at  A  and  B ;  for,  unless 
unusual  care  is  taken  in  drilling,  they  are  likely  to  be  out 
of  line.  By  use  of  the  cross  feed  the  work  may  be  moved 
in  until  the  seat  is  cut  to  the  desired  depth.  For  cutting 
slot  some  prefer  the  Cotter  mill,  page  135.  Each  of  these 
•  mills  when  dropped  directly  into  the  work,  leaves  a  teat 
in  the  centre,  but  when  the  work  is  fed  along  to  make  the 
slot,  the  Cotter  mill  will  cut  the  teat  off  more  easily  than 
the  end  mill.  Neither  a  Cotter  mill  nor  an  end  mill  should 
be  used  in  making  slots  when  they  can  be  made  with  a 
regular  milling  cutter,  page  126  for  milling  cutters  cut 
faster  and  produce  slots  more  uniform  in  size  than  either 
end  or  Cotter  mills. 

The  End  Mill  with  centre  cut,  page  126,  is  useful 
where  it  is  desired  to  cut  into  the  work  with  the  end  of 
the  mill,  and  then  move  along  as  in  cams,  grooves,  etc.,  as 
the  teeth  have  a  cutting  edge,  and  are  sharp  on  the  inside, 
and  thus  cut  a  path  out  from  the  first  entering  point. 


OK    THK 

UNIVERSITY 


BROWN  &  SHARPE   MFG.  CO. 


.  27. 


FIG.  2$. 


FIG.  29. 


FIG.  3O. 


156  BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 

They  are  also  useful  in  taking  heavy  cuts,  especially  in 
cast  iron,  by  reason  of  the  coarse  teeth. 

When,  as  in  Fig.  32,  the  centre  of  the  index  spindle 
must  be  at  the  same  height  as  the  cone  spindle,  the  top  of 
the  knee  is  brought  to  the  line  on  the  frame  marked 
centre. 

Should  it  be  desirable  to  go  either  above  or  below  the 
centre  of  the  spindle  a  given  distance,  the  graduated  col- 
lar on  the  lower  screw  shafts  may  be  turned  and  set  at 
zero  ;  then  by  use  of  the  following  table  of  decimal  equiva- 
lents the  distance  may  be  readily  determined  in  eighths, 
sixteenths,  etc.,  as  every  turn  of  the  screw  shaft  will  raise 
or  lower  the  knee  one  tenth  or  one  hundred  one  thou- 
sandths of  an  inch. 


T  SLOT  CUTTER. 


BROWN  &  SHARPE  MFG.  CO 


Fin.  st. 


158 


BROWN  &  SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


TABLE  OF  DECIMAL  EQUIVALENTS. 


8ths. 

-£,=.21875 

A}=.265625 

i  —  105 

-&=.  28125 

if—  .296875 

f='.25 

|i=.  34375 

21—  .328125 

^=.40625 

|f=.  359375 

|=.50 

•jf=.  46875 

£}=.  390625 

-|Ji=.  53125 

|J=.  421875 

^  —  .75 

i|=.  59375 

||=.  453125 

1=^875 

|J=.  65625 
ff=.71875 

fi=.  484375 
ff=.  515625 

16ths. 

|f=.  78125 
|J=.  84375 

f}=.  546875 
|J=.  578125 

T^-zr.0625 

|f=.  90625 

f|=.  609375 

^=.1875 

|i=.  96875 

fj=.  640625 

^=.3125 

|J=.  671875 

TV=.4375 

ff=.703125 

^=.5625 

64ths. 

4j=.  734375 

H—  6875 

if=.8125 

^=.015625 

49  —  .765625 
|J=.  796875 

|firz.9375 

•fa=.  078125 

f}=-828125 

32nds. 

¥\=.  109375 

-|}=.  859375 
|}=.  890625 

i  _  03125 

||=.  171875 

f|=.  921875 

-^-=.09375 
¥52  =  .  15625 

^|=.  203125 
J}=.  234375 

|i=.  953125 
ff=.  984375 

Fig.  33  shows  a  key-way,  widest  at  the  bottom,  that  is 
cut  by  an  angular  shank  mill  similar  to  an  end  mill. 
Such  key-ways  are  used  in  a  number  of  places,  for  instance, 
where  change  gears  are  to  be  kept  from  slipping  by  a  key. 
If  made  in  a  single  cut,  and  the  mill  be  a  delicate  one,  it 
is  preferable  to  feed  by  hand,  as  the  resistance  and  prog- 
ress can  be  easily  felt,  and  the  liability  of  breaking  the 
tool  obviated. 

In  Fig.  34,  at  G,  is  seen  the  milling  of  an  angular  slot 
for  a  slide.  At  D  is  shown  the  milling  of  a  slide.  At  E 
is  the  milling  of  a  T  slot.  In  this  case  a  slot  is  first  cut 
to  the  full  depth  of  the  T  slot  and  then  finished  by  a  mill 
like  that  shown  at  E.  A  mill  shown  on  page  156,  with 
every  other  tooth  shortened  at  one  end,  lasts  longer  and 
cuts  faster  in  milling  T  slots  than  an  ordinary  end  mill. 


UNiVL 


BROWN  &  SHARPE   MFG.  CO. 


FIG.  3C>. 


160  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

Some  T  slots  are  enclosed  like  F,  Fig.  34,  and  to  enter 
this  a  hole  is  sometimes  made  at  the  back  through  the 
body  of  the  piece. 

In  milling  cored  T  slots  in  cast  iron,  it  is  better  to  have 
the  mill  small  enough  to  cut  only  one  side  of  the  slot  at  a 
time,  and  the  side  of  the  slot  that  is  being  milled  should 
move  against  the  mill.  If  the  mill  is  large  enough  to  cut 
both  sides  at  once,  then  the  teeth  strike  the  scale  first  in 
the  side  of  the  slot  that  runs  with  the  mill  and  are  soon 
dulled.  A  full  size  mill  is  also  likely  to  be  broken  by 
catching  upon  high  places  in  the  side  of  the  slot.  It  is 
doubtful  whether  anything  is  gained  by  coring  T  slots  that 
are  to  be  milled. 

It  is  usually  economical  to  do  work  like  C,  Fig.  34,  with 
a  formed  cutter,  and  anything  like  B,  should  certainly  be 
done  with  such  a  cutter.  A  very  simple  example  of  form 
milling  is  seen  at  A,  where  a  corner  is  rounded  for  a  finish. 
This  method  costs  less  and  is  more  perfect  than  finishing 
corners  with  a  file,  and  for  such  work  a  mill  of  large 
diameter  used  on  an  arbor  is  better  than  a  shank  mill, 
unless  the  shank  mill  is  run  very  fast. 

Fig.  35  shows  a  method  of  cutting  a  slot  or  groove  with 
a  milling  cutter.  The  piece  shown  is  cast  iron  and  the 
cuts  are  to  a  close  limit. 

Special         A  lathe  carriage  in  which  T  slots  have  been  milled*  is 
'  shown  in  Figure  36.     The  bearings  of  this  carriage  and 
the  ways  of  the  lathe  bed  are  also  milled,  and  the  method 
of  doing  this  work  is  indicated  by  Fig.  37. 

The  teeth  of  hair  clippers  shown  in  Fig.  38,  are  exam- 
ples of  work  done  on  the  No.  12  Plain  Milling  Machine. 

In  Fig.  39  is  shown  a  method  of  milling  a  surface  and 
squaring  one  side  of  a  projection  on  the  surface.  The 
vise  jaws  are  special  to  hold  the  work  in  the  best  manner 
and  to  save  time  in  setting  it  in  position. 

In  Fig.  40  is  seen  the  use  of  formed  cutters  in  milling 
rack  teeth.  The  cutter  shown  is  made  in  three  parts  and 
each  part  cuts  six  teeth  in  the  rack. 


BROWN   &   SHARPE   MFG.  CO. 


161 


FIG.  37. 


•  V 

BROWN  &  SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


FIG.  38. 


BROWN   &  SHARPE   MFG.  CO. 


iN^-       '-•  ••  '•••    '     :'  '  ';". 


FIG.  39. 


FIG.  4O. 


164 


BROWN  &  SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


FIG.  43. 


FIG.   42. 


FIG.  44, 


FIG.  45. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


»,»>-. \ 

r 


h-n»-i^»»j|  L»»»— ••^1 


0 


(oY^^^^^ 

V  x.x'  /    vjwi •. — : — •&&%> 

\^^/     \w^.:.............:...,.;.^y 


FIG.  46. 


i66 


BROWN  &   SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


FIG.  47. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  167 

When  a  few  pieces  are  to  have  round  ends  they  may  be 
milled  as  in  Fig.  41,  the  piece  R  being  rotated  about  S 
against  the  mill  C. 

Figs.  42  and  43  are  representative  operations  that  need 
no  description. 

Fig.  44  sh6ws  how  a  cylinder  may  be  bored  and  one  end 
squared  in  a  milling  machine,  the  action  of  the  parts  of  a 
Plain  Milling  Machine  being  quite  similar  to  that  of  a 
boring  machine. 

Fig.  45  shows  a  method  of  milling  between  the  arms  of 
hand  wheels. 

Fig.  46  shows  samples  of  work  done  on  the  Vertical 
Spindle  Milling  Machine.  Many  of  these  cuts  may  also 
be  made,  though  less  conveniently,  on  machines  with  hori- 
zontal spindles,  and  all  may  be  made  on  a  horizontal 
machine  with  a  Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Attachment. 

As  an  illustration  of  the  number  of  operations  and  the 
variety  of  work  which  can  profitably  be  done  on  the  mill- 
ing  machine  in  the  manufacture  of  machine  tools,  we  give  universal 
an  approximate  list  of  the  milling  operations  performed  in 
our  works  in  the  manufacture  of  the  spiral  head  of  the 
No.  i  Universal  Milling  Machine.  Those  marked  with  a 
star  require  the  use  of  an  Index  Head,  but  by  far  the 
larger  part  of  the  work  can  be  done  without  an  Index 
Head  upon  our  various  Universal  or  Plain  Milling 
Machines,  and  are  examples  of  what  may  be  practically 
termed  plain  milling. 


1 68  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


LIST  OF  THE  MILLING  OPERATIONS  IN  THE  MANUFACTURE  OF  THE 

NO.  1  UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINE  SPIRAL  HEAD  AND 

FOOT-STOCK, 


SPIRAL   HEAD,    FIG.  47. 

NO.  OF  CUTS. 

*Rougliing  both  sides  and  finishing  top '. 3 

Milling  bottom  and  angle  as  shown  in  Fig.  48 1 

Milling  back  end , 1 

Milling  around  lug  for  worm 1 

*Milling  front  end '. 1 

*Bevel  cut  clearance  for  mitre  gears 1 

SPIRAL  BOX,  FIG.  51. 

Milling  inside  bottom 1 

Milling  recess  for  nuts  on  bottom 2 

Milling  back  side 1 

*Milling  around  circle 1 

*Milling  around  circle  on  top 2 

Milling  circular  bolt  slots 2 

Milling  for  tongue  in  bottom 1 

Milling  complete  sector 3 

INDEX  CRANK  J,  FIG.  3. 

Milling  both  sides 2 

Milling  both  edges  with  a  form  cutter .2 

Milling  slot  as  shown  in  Fig.  50 1 

WORM  SHAFT  O,  FIG.  3. 

*Straddle  cut  for  index  crank 1 

*Cut  for  worm  key,  Fig.  49 1 

SPIRAL  SHELL. 

^Milling  dovetail  key-way  similar  to  Fig.  33 . .  1 

FACE  PLATE. 

Gang  cut  ends  and  slot  like  Fig.  52 2 

CENTRE. 

Milling  spot  for  set  screw 1 

MITRE   GEAR  COYER. 

Milling  complete 6 


BROWN  &   SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


169 


FIG.  48. 


FIG.  49. 


FIG.  50. 


I/O  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.     CO. 

MITRE  GEAR  BLOCK. 

NO.  OF  CUTS. 

Milling  two  gang  cuts,  like  Fig.  53 2 

SHEET  STEELS. 

Milling  around  the  edges  of  worm  wheel  cover  and  mitre  gear  cover, 
shown  in  black  lines  in  Figs.  3  and  4 11 

BACK  CENTRE. 

Milling  bottom .- 1 

Milling  sides 2 

BACK  CENTRE  STAND. 

Milling  face 1 

Milling  top 1 

Milling  back  side 1 

Milling  bottom  similar  to  Fig.  24 1 

CENTRE  REST. 

Sawing  off  part  of  base 1 

Milling  bottom  for  tongue,  similar  to  Fig.  24 1 


LIST  OF  THE  MILLING  OPERATIONS  IN  THE  MANUFACTURE  OF  THE 
NO,  2  UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINE. 


TABLE. 

NO.   OF   CUTS. 

Milling  top,  sides,  bottom  and  edges 2 

Milling  Ys  with  angular  cutter 2 

Milling  T  slots  similar  to  E,  Fig.  34 2 

Milling  oil  grooves 1 

Milling  one  end  similar  to  face  milling 1 

Milling  table  dog  slot 2 

SADDLE. 

Milling  bottom  similar  to  Fig.  54 1 

Milling  top  and  sides ....    1 

Milling  Ys  with  angular  cutter 1 

CLAMP  BED. 

Milling  top  and  sides  similar  to  Fig.  53 1 

Milling  bottom  similar  to  Fig.  54 1 

Milling  T  slots 2 


BROWN  &  SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


171 


FIG.  51. 


BROWN  &   SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


52. 


FIG.  53. 


FIG.  54. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  173 

KNEE. 

NO.  OF  CUTS. 

Milling  top  and  edges,  page  25 1 

Milling  base  and  slide  complete 2 

Milling  clamp  bed  slides 2 

Milling  front  end 1 

TABLE   STOP. 
Milling  table  seat , 1 

TABLE   STOP   GIBS. 
Milling  top  and  bottom 2 

FEED   TRIP   SLIDE. 

Straddle  milling  side  and  back  similar  to  Fig.  27 1 

Milling  ends  and  slot 2 

Milling  front 1 

FEED  ROCKER. 

Milling  top 1 

Milling  bottom 1 

FEED  REVERSING  LEVER. 

Milling  edges 1 

Milling  sides 1 

TABLE  SCREW   BEARING. 
Milling  foot 1 

FEED  CLUTCH   FORK. 

Straddle  milling  sides 1 

Straddle  milling  ends , 2 

Milling  inside 1 

Milling  round  edges 2 

TABLE   SCREW. 

Milling  key- way  (long)  similar  to  page  174 2 

Milling  3  key-ways  (short) 3 

CONE  GEAR  GUARD    (CENTRE). 
Milling  ends 1 

SPINDLE  AND  CONE  GEAR  GUARDS   (FRONT  AND  REAR.) 
Milling  ends 1 

CLUTCH  SLEEVE. 
Milling  slots 2 

KNEE   SCREW. 
Milling  key- way 1 


174 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO.  175 

KNEE   SHAFT. 

NO.  OF  CUTS. 

Milling  key-way 1 

CROSS  FEED  SCREW. 

Milling  key- way 1 

Milling  square  on  end 4 

SPINDLE. 
Milling  key-ways 3 

STOP   ROD. 
Milling  key-way 1 

VERTICAL   FEED   SHAFT. 
Milling  key-way 1 

KNEE   STOPS. 
Milling  clamp  slot 1 

TABLE  DOG. 

Milling  front  side 1 

Milling  back  side 1 

Milling  form  on  top 1 

CONE. 
Milling  dog  slot 1 

CONE  DOG  BOLT. 
Milling  flats 2 

ARM  CENTRE. 

Milling  key-way 1 

Milling  knob  slot 1 

LOWER  FEED   SHAFT   SLEEVE. 
Milling  key-way 1 

INTERNAL   FEED   PULLEY   SLEEVE. 
Milling  key-way 1 

SADDLE  SWIVEL. 

Milling  key-way 1 

Milling  slot 1 

CLUTCH   GEAR  BEARING  CAPS   R.    AND  L. 
Milling  seat 2 

SPINDLE  FRONT   BOX. 
Milling  slot 1 

SPINDLE  REAR   BOX. 
Milling  slot .1 


176  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

USE  OF  MILLING  MACHINES, 

INDEXING. 


Use  of         The   first  office  of  the  indexing  head  stock  or   spiral 

Indexing 

Head  to    head,  as  mentioned  in  the  description  of  the  machines  is 

Divide  /  t 

Periphery  to  divide  the  periphery  of  a  piece  of  work  into  a  number 

into  Equal  of  equal  parts,  and  in   connection  with  the  foot  stock,  it 

also   enables   the  milling  machine  to    be   used  for  work 

sometimes    done    on  planer  centres  and  on  gear  cutting 

machines. 

Direct         As  the  index  spindle  may  be  revolved  by   the  crank, 

Indexing. 

and  as  forty  turns  of  the  crank  make  one  revolution  of 
the  spindle,  to  find  how  many  turns  of  the  crank  are 
necessary  for  a  certain  division  of  the  work,  or  what  is  the 
same  thing,  for  a  certain  division  of  a  revolution  of  the 
spindle,  forty  is  divided  by  the  number  of  the  divisions 
which  are  desired.  The  rule  then,  may  be  said  to  be, 
divide  forty  by  the  number  of  divisions  to  be  made  and 
the  quotient  will  be  the  number  of  turns,  or  the  part  of 
a  turn,  of  the  crank,  which  will  give  each  desired  division. 
Applying  this  rule — to  make  forty  divisions  the  crank  would 
be  turned  completely  around  once  to  obtain  each  division, 
or  to  obtain  twenty  divisions  it  would  be  turned  twice. 
When,  to  obtain  the  necessary  divisions,  the  crank  has  to 
index  be  turned  only  a  part  of  the  way  around,  an  index  plate 
is  used.  For  example  :  If  the  work  is  to  be  divided  into 
eighty  divisions  the  crank  must  be  turned  one-half  way 
around,  and  an  index  plate  with  an  even  number  of 
holes  in  one  of  the  circles  would  be  selected,  it  being 
necessary  only  to  have  two  holes  opposite  to  each  other  in 
the  plate.  If  the  work  is  to  be  divided  into  three  divisions 
an  index  plate  should  be  selected  which  has  a  circle  with 
a  number  of  holes  that  can  be  divided  by  three,  as  fifteen 


BROWN  &  SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


177 


FIG.  55. 


178  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

or  eighteen  in  Fig.  55,  the  numbers  on  the  index  plates 
indicating  the  number  of  holes  in  the  various  circles. 
Sector.  The  sector  is  of  service  in  obviating  the  necessity  of 
counting  the  holes  at  each  partial  rotation  or  turn  of  the 
crank,  and  to  illustrate  its  use  it  may  be  supposed  that  it 
is  desired  to  divide  the  work  into  144  divisions.  Dividing 
40  by  1 44  the  result,  T5g,  shows  that  the  index  crank  must 
be  moved  T5§-  of  a  turn  to  obtain  each  of  the  144  divisions. 
An  index  plate  with  a  circle  containing  eighteen  holes  or 
a  multiple  of  eighteen,  is  selected,  and  the  sector  is  set  to 
measure  off  five  spaces  or  the  corresponding  multiple, 
ten  spaces  for  example,  in  a  circle  with  thirty-six  holes. 
When  the  sector  is  set  it  is  held  in  place  by  the  screw  C, 
Fig.  55.  In  setting  the  sector  it  should  be  remembered 
that  there  must  always  be  one  more  hole  between  the 
arms  than  there  are  spaces  to  be  counted  or  measured  off. 
Starting  with  the  crank  pin  in  the  hole  B,  for  example,  a 
cut  would  be  made  in  the  work  and  then  the  crank  would 
be  turned  and  the  pin  brought  into  the  hole  at  A  and  a 
second  cut  made  in  the  work.  The  sector  would  then  be 
moved  to  the  position  shown  at  dotted  line,  that  is  ,the  arm 
would  be  brought  against  the  pin  in  the  crank.  When  the 
third  cut  is  to  be  made  the  crank  would  be  turned  and  the 
pin  brought  to  the  hole  D.  The  next  step  would  bring  the 
pin  to  the  hole  E,  and  so  on.  When  the  operation  has 
been  repeated  144  times  one  revolution  of  the  spindle 
will  have  been  made.  The  required  number  of  turns  of 
the  crank  for  a  large  number  of  divisions  may  be  readily 
ascertained  from  the  accompanying  index  tables. 
Effect  of  If  the  angle  of  elevation  of  the  spiral  head  spindle  is 
Angle  o'f  changed  during  the  progress  of  the  work,  the  work  must 
of  Spindle,  be  rotated  slightly  to  bring  it  back  to  the  proper  position, 
as  when  the  spindle  is  elevated  or  depressed,  the  worm 
wheel  is  rotated  about  the  worm,  and  the  effect  is  the  same 
as  if  the  worm  were  turned  in  the  opposite  direction. 
Examples  A  simple  use  of  the  index  centres  is  that  of  milling  bolt 
°Miii?ng'  heads,  nuts,  etc.  Those  shown  in  Figs.  27,  28  and  29,  for 

Bolt  Heads. 


BROWN  &  SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


179 


INDEX  TABLE. 


,i 

IS 

X 

.j. 

$M 

| 

3 

12 

EH  a 

5 

ll 

n 

o 

O  jj 

00 

0 

"o  ^ 

oo 

ta 

fi  0) 

.8  g 

H43*?? 

Jj.3 

Is 

jk*-'w 

|| 

P  O 

S  r-t  "^ 

—  ^ 

S  2 

S  *-  *~* 

g 

g  -a 

^  -5  O 

—  o 

§a 

rj  .£  O 

§  0 

55 

525 

_ 

^ 

fe 

><A 

2 

MY 

20 

C5 

49 

IT'V 

3 

39 

13^f 

36 

27 

1  3 

4 

ANY 

10 

37 

37 

1* 

5 

<t 

8 

38 

19 

6 

39 

6|| 

39 

39 

1  i 

7 

49 

5|_| 

40 

ANY 

1 

8 

ANY 

54 

41 

41 

ff 

9 

27 

4±|. 

42 

21 

-I  1 

n 

10 

ANY 

4 

43 

43 

<i  i 
H 

11 

33 

32.  j. 

44 

33 

IS- 

12 

39 

313. 

45 

27 

13 

39 

3_3g. 

46 

23 

ll  *7 

14 

49 

2ff 

47 

47 

^  o 

15 

39 

2|| 

48 

18 

H  47 

16 

20 

49 

49 

1  o 

17 

17 

2A 

50 

20 

1  () 
"So 

18 

27 

52 

39 

19 

19 

§ 

54 

27 

If  3 

20 

ANY 

2 

55 

33 

II 

21 

21 

l1!- 

56 

49 

22 

33 

1ft 

58 

29 

T  (J 

23 

23 

60 

39 

-If 

24 

39 

124 

62 

31 

3  u 
2  0 

25 

20 

HI 

64 

16 

H  *' 

26 

39 

ill 

65 

39 

H 

27 

27 

66 

33 

o  y 

H 

28 

49 

l|i 

68 

17 

3  3 

H 

29 

29 

-^ii 

70 

49 

H 

30 

39 

11.3. 

72 

27 

}4 

31 

31 

•^¥9T 

74 

37 

If 

32 

20 

1^5_ 

75 

15 

ft 

33 

33 

13T_ 

76 

19 

1  a 

34 

17 

IA 

78 

39 

"  l» 

i8o 


BROWN   &   SHARPE   MFG.  CO. 


INDEX  TABLE. 


•> 

s 

o 

Is 

S.2 

3  to 
fc 

Number  of  Holes 
in  the  Index 
Circle. 

Number  of  Turns 
of  the  Crank. 

. 

Number  of  Divi- 
sions. 

Number  of  Holes 
in  the  Index 
Circle. 

Number  of  Turns 
of  the  Crank. 

80 

20 

H 

164 

41 

tt 

82 

41 

H 

165 

33 

A 

84 

21 

H 

168 

21 

A 

85 

17 

I\ 

170 

17 

T47 

86 

43 

H 

172 

43 

H 

88 

33 

H 

180 

27 

A 

90 

27 

44 

184 

23 

A 

92 

23 

H 

185 

37 

-fr 

94 

47 

if 

188 

47 

« 

95 

19 

TV 

190 

19 

TV 

98 

49 

H 

195 

39 

A 

100 

20 

A 

196 

49 

H 

104 

39 

H 

200 

20 

A 

105 

21 

205 

41 

A 

108 

27 

ii 

210 

21 

A 

110 

33 

«2 

215 

43 

A 

-115 

23 

A 

216 

27 

A 

116 

29 

i* 

220 

33 

A 

120 

39 

« 

230 

23 

A 

124 

31 

« 

232 

29 

A 

128 

16 

A 

235 

47 

A 

130 

39 

it 

240 

18 

T3? 

132 

33 

if 

245 

49 

A 

135 

27 

A 

248 

31 

A 

136 

17 

A 

260 

39 

A 

140 

49 

H 

264 

33 

& 

144 

18 

T5T 

270 

27 

A 

145 

29 

A 

280 

49 

A 

148 

37 

H 

290 

29 

A 

150 

15 

T4! 

296 

37 

A 

152 

19 

A 

300 

15 

A 

155 

31 

A 

310 

31 

A 

156 

39 

i* 

312 

39 

A 

160 

20 

A 

360 

18 

A 

BROWN  &   SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


181 


FIG. 


FIG.  57. 


FIG.   58. 


FJG.  59. 


1 82  '  BROWN    A    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

instance,  could  be  milled  by  being  held  on  the  spiral  head 
instead  of  the  fixture  previously  described. 
Dividing        Among  work  commonly  divided  on  the  index  centres  are 

Cutters,  etc. 

saws,  page  126;  screw  slotting  cutters,  page  126;  and  a 
large  variety  of  straight  tooth  mills,  as  shown  on  page  126. 
Cutting  the  teeth  of  ratchets  represents  a  similar  use  of  the 
centres.  In  milling  teeth  of  angular  cutters  the  index 
spindle  can  be  set  as  shown  in  Fig.  56,  and  when  the 
spindle  and  cutter  are  in  this  position  the  knee  of  the 
machine  is  raised  by  the  vertical  feed.  Fig.  57  shows 
that  the  same  cutter  may  be  used  for  making  a  right  or 
left  hand  mill,  in  one  case  the  feed  being  vertical  and  the 
other  horizontal. 

Fluting  The  fluting  or  grooving  of  taps  and  reamers  is  another 
Reamers,  kind  of  work  in  which  index  centres  are  used.  A  table 
showing  the  tap  and  reamer  cutters  to  be  used  in  grooving 
reamers  is  given  in  our  catalogue,  different  cutters  being 
used  for  a  certain  size  reamer  than  for  the  same  size  tap. 
The  accompanying  table  gives  the  figures  for  setting  taps 
sidewise  and  also  for  the  depths  of  groove.  These  figures 
will  be  found  convenient,  but  are  not  given  to  be  followed 
absolutely,  for  mechanics  have  different  opinions  as  to  the 
best  shape  and  the  proper  depth  of  groove  in  taps. 

The  columns  in  the  table  as  marked  refer  to  the  special 
tap  cutters,  the  shape  of  which  are  shown  in  Fig.  58,  and 
tap  and  reamer  cutters  Fig.  59.  One  class  of  our  twist 
drill  cutters  have  a  round  edge,  and  can  also  be  used  in 
grooving  taps. 

The  top  of  the  table  of  the  machine  when  doing  this 
work  is  moved  sidewise  along  the  distance  A,  between  B  B 
and  e,  which  is  .125  of  an  inch,  as  given  in  the  column 
under  A.  The  work  is  next  set  for  the  depth  of  the  cut 
d,  which  is  given  in  the  table  under  the  column  d,  and  is 
.2  of  an  inch.  This  depth  is  read  off  by  the  graduated 
collar  on  the  vertical  feed  shaft. 

The  depth  of  groove  cut  in  a  tap  by  a  special  tap  cutter 
is  .2  of  the  diameter  of  the  tap.  The  depth  of  groove  cut 
by  a  tap  and  reamer  cutter  is  .23  of  the  diameter  of  the  tap. 


BROWN   &   SHARPE   MFG.  CO. 


Table  for  Setting  when  Cutting  with   Special  Tap  Cut 
ters,  or  with  Tap  and   Reamer  Cutters. 


Value  of  A,  d  and  A',  d' 

Diameter 

No. 

Diameter 

of 

of 

of 

Tap. 

Cutter. 

A= 

d= 

A'= 

d'= 

Cutter. 

i              1 

.025 

.025 

.000 

.028 

If 

A 

2 

.003 

.031 

* 

.035 

a 

A' 

u 

.018 

.037 

.000 

.043 

it 

A 

a 

.034 

.043 

.015 

.050 

il 

I 

u 

.050 

.050 

.031 

.057 

it 

A 

3 

.028 

.056 

.015 

.065 

1| 

A 

a 

.043 

.062 

.031 

.072 

U 

I 

a 

.075 

.075 

.062 

.086 

it 

A 

4 

.031 

.087 

.031 

.100 

2 

i 

u 

.062 

.100 

.062 

.115 

a 

A 

u 

.093 

.112 

.093 

.129 

a 

1 

it 

.125 

.125 

.125 

.144 

n 

tt 

5 

.081 

.137 

.093 

.158 

2} 

f 

" 

.112 

.150 

.125 

.172 

u 

i* 

a 

.143 

.162 

.156 

.187 

a 

" 

.175 

.175 

.187 

.200 

a 

If 

G 

.093 

.187 

.125 

.215 

2i 

i 

« 

.125 

.200 

.156 

.230 

a 

IA 

» 

.156 

.212 

.187 

.245 

< 

i* 

4. 

.187 

.225 

.218 

.258 

i 

IA 

U 

.218 

.237 

.250 

.273 

i 

4 

(i 

.250 

.250 

.281 

.287 

i 

IT'TT 

7 

.168 

.262 

.218 

.300 

2c 

1| 

" 

.200 

.275 

.250 

.316 

i 

IA 

.231 

.287 

.281 

.330 

' 

li 

.262 

.300 

.312 

.345 

i 

4 

u 

.293 

.312 

.344 

.359 

<• 

It 

(i 

.325 

.325 

.375 

.373 

a 

IH 

8 

.243 

.337 

.312 

.388 

2f 

12 

a 

.275 

.350 

.344 

.400 

it 

15 

a 

.337 

.375 

.406 

.430 

U 

2 

a 

.400 

.400 

.468 

.460 

il 

*  No.  2  Regular  Cutter,  Ty  thick. 


184  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

The  machine,  as  a  rule,  is  fed  automatically  while  cut- 
ting, and  after  each  cut  is  taken  the  index  crank  is  turned 
as  previously  described. 
Screw         Fisr.  60  shows  a  tool  used  in  a  screw  machine  or  turret 

Machine 

Tool,     lathe.    The  three  views  show  the  results  of  the  various 

Milling  Machine  cuts. 

Cutting  In  cutting  gears  care  must  be  taken  to  have  the  cutter 
central  with  the  index  centres,  and  to  have  the  cut  the 
exact  depth  required.  A  good  way  of  testing  the  setting 
is  to  cut  a  groove  in  a  piece  on  the  centres,  then  shift  the 
piece  end  for  end  and  try  the  groove  upon  the  cutter.  A 
good  method  of  holding  the  gear  blanks  is  on  an  arbor 
with  a  taper  shank  which  fits  in  the  index  spindle,  the 
outer  end  of  the  arbor  being  supported  by  the  foot  stock 
centre.  Frequently  in  cutting  gears  we  use  a  shank  arbor 
with  expanding  bushing  and  a  nut  on  the  arbor  at  each 
end  of  the  bushing,  one  nut  forcing  the  bushing  up  on  the 
arbor  and  holding  the  gear  blank,  while  the  other  pushes 
the  bushing  off  the  taper  and  releases  the  gear  when 
finished.  If  the  common  arbor  and  dog  are  used,  care 
should  be  taken  that  the  dog  does  not  spring  the  arbor. 
The  screws,  Fig.  2,  may  be  used  to  hold  the  dog  so  that 
there  shall  be  no  back  lash  between  the  index  spindle  and 
the  work.  The  depth  of  the  cut  can  be  gauged  from  the 
outside  of  the  blank,  or,  if  desired,  marked  on  the  side  by 
a  gear  tooth  depth  gauge.  In  cutting  gears,  when  the 
blank  has  been  placed  in  position  it  is  raised  by  the  ele- 
vating screw  until  it  just  touches  the  cutter.  The  gradu- 
ated collar  on  the  vertical  feed  shaft  is  placed  on  zero  and 
the  blank  moved  horizontally  from  the  cutter.  Then  the 
work  is  raised  the  number  of  thousandths  of  an  inch 
required  for  the  depth  of  tooth. 

In  our  catalogue  we  give  the  depth  of  gear  teeth  of  a 
number  of  pitches,  directions  regarding  sizing  and  cutting 
of  gear  wheels,  formulae  for  determining  the  dimensions 
of  small  gears  by  diametral  pitch,  also  directions  for 
selecting  involute  and  epicycloidal  gear  cutters  for  any 
given  pitch.  The  catalogue  contains  as  well  a  number  of 


BROWN  &   SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


F 16.  CO. 


1 86  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

plain  rules  for  determining  various   dimensions  of  gears. 
More  complete  information  on  this  subject  is  given  in  our 
"  Practical    Treatise    on    Gearing,"    and    "  Formulas   in 
Gearing." 
worm         For  several   years  we  have  milled  the  faces  of  worm 

Wheels. 

wheels  in  our  Universal  Milling  Machines,  as  this  costs 
less  and  is  better  than  turning  them  in  an  engine  lathe. 
The  operation  will  be  understood  from  Fig.  6 1 ,  one  part  of 
which  shows  a  segment  of  a  spur  wheel,  and  the  other 
part  S,  a  segment  of  a  worm  wheel  blank. 

The  practice  involved  in  cutting  worm  wheels  is  seen  in 
Fig.  62. 

The  index  centres  are  set  central  with  the  cutter  on  the 
line  C  D,  as  in  cutting  spur  gears.  The  arbor  holding  the 
worm  wheel  blank  is  put  on  the  centres,  and  by  moving 
the  table  lengthwise  the  centre  of  the  face  of  the  worm 
wheel  is  set  under  the  centre  of  the  cutter  spindle  A  B. 
The  table  stop  is  put  on  so  that  the  table  will  not  move, 
then  the  saddle  is  set  to  the  angle  of  the  teeth  as  seen  by 
the  lines  E  and  C  D,  and  the  vertical  feed  is  used  in  cut- 
ting the  work.  Worm  wheels  can  be  hobbed  in  the  Uni- 
versal Milling  Machine. 

The  wheel  can  be  hobbed  to  the  right  depth  by  setting 
a  rule  on  the  top  of  the  knee  and  measuring  up  to  the  line 
marked  centre  on  the  side  of  the  frame,  for  when  the  back 
of  the  knee  is  at  this  line  the  index  centres  are  at  the 
same  height  as  the  centre  of  the  cone  spindle,  the  meas- 
urement from  the  knee  to  this  line  being,  in  other  words, 
the  distance  between  the  centres  of  the  worm  and  wheel. 
When  hobbing  a  worm  wheel  the  shaft  of  which  is  at 
right  angles  with  the  axis  of  the  worm,  the  spiral  bed  should 
be  set  at  zero. 

On  page  187  is  shown  a  worm  hob  that  is  made  in  the 
same  manner  as  a  formed  cutter,  and  can  be  sharpened 
by  grinding  without  changing  its  form. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


i87 


FIG.  61. 


FIG.   62. 


WORM   HOB  WITH   RELIEVED  TEETH. 


l88  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


DSE  OF  MILLING  MACHINES, 

COMPOUND      INDEXING. 


in  This  system  of  indexing  is  not  ordinarily  used  to  any 
Defined.  great  extent.  Frequently,  however,  it  is  desired  to  divide 
the  work  into  divisions  other  than  those  which  can  be 
attained  by  direct  indexing,  method  described  on  page  176, 
from  the  index  plates  furnished  with  the  machine. 

In  this  case  the  method  termed  compound  indexing  is 
used  ;  a  method  which  has  been  considered  quite  fully  by 
Messrs.  Fred  J.  Miller,  Walter  Gribben,  G.  Schneider  and 
J.  V.  Hamilton,  and  explained  by  them  in  contributions  to 
the  "American  Machinist,"  October  3ist,  December  i2th, 
1889,  and  January  i6th,  May  22nd,  July  iyth,  August  i4th, 
and  October  i6th,  1890. 

On  the  following  pages  'we  offer  tables,  for  which  we  are 
chiefly  indebted  to  the  kindness  of  Mr.  Walter  Gribben, 
by  the  use  of  which  these  results  can  be  obtained  with  the 
index  plates  furnished  with  the  machines. 

The  method  of  combining  the  two  index  settings  is  indi- 
cated by  the  signs  plus  and  minus ;  the  plus  sign  showing 
that  the  two  indexings  are  added  together,  or  that  the 
movement  of  the  work  in  both  indexings  is  in  the  same 
direction,  while  the  minus  sign  shows  that  we  take  the  dif- 
ference between  the  two  indexings,  or  that  we  move  one 
indexing  in  one  direction  and  the  second  indexing  in  the 
opposite  direction,  the  principle  in  making  the  calculations 
being  simply  the  addition  or  subtraction  of  fractions.  The 
denominators  of  the  fractions  indicate  which  circles  of 
holes  are  used  in  the  index  plates. 

Direct  indexing  is  obtained  by  moving  the  pin  straight 
ahead  on  a  single  circle.  Tables  are  given  on  pages  179 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  189 

and  1 80,  showing  the  divisions  that  can  be  obtained  by 
direct  indexing. 

If  desired  special  index  plates  can  be  furnished,  but  in 
most  cases  it  will  be  found  cheaper  and  quicker  to  use  the 
compound  indexing  method,  as  described  above. 

To  illustrate  the  manner  of  using  the  machine  in  com-  Manner  of 

Using  the 

pound  indexing,  it  may  be  supposed  that  we  desire  to  divide  Machines. 
the  work  into  69  parts.  Reference  to  the  table,  page  191, 
shows  that  the  work  is  moved  through  21  spaces,  or 
holes  in  the  23  hole  circle  and  then  turned  in  the  oppo- 
site direction  1 1  holes  in  the  33  hole  circle  of  one  of 
the  index  plates.  The  first  movement  is  made  in  the  ordi- 
nary manner.  The  stop  or  back  pin  is  placed  in  the  33 
hole  circle,  the  index  crank  pin  is  pulled  out  of  the 
23  hole  circle,  and  the  index  crank  is  turned  through 
21  holes  in  the  desired  direction,  the  holes  being 
measured  by  the  sector.  For  the  second  movement,  the 
index  crank  pin  is  left  in  the  23  hole  circle,  the  back  pin 
is  pulled  back  from  the  plate,  and  as  the  minus  sign  is 
given  in  the  table,  the  crank  is  turned  1 1  holes  in  the 
direction  opposite  to  that  of  the  former  movement.  In 
this  part  of  the  indexing  the  index  plate  and  crank  turn 
together,  and  as  there  is  no  sector  on  the  back  of  the 
plate,  the  holes  or  spaces  have  to  be  counted  directly 
in  the  plate.  Had  the  plus  sign  been  given,  as  in  the 
indexing  to  obtain  77  divisions  of  the  work,  both  move- 
ments of  the  crank  would  have  been  in  the  same  direction. 
Ordinarily  the  order  of  the  movements  is  not  material  and 
if  more  convenient  for  any  reason,  the  back  pin  could 
usually  be  withdrawn  first,  and  the  movement  described 
as  the  second  could  be  made  first.  In  some  instances 
indeed,  for  example,  in  dividing  the  work  into  174,  272  or 
273  parts,  the  outer  circle  is  naturally  used  first. 

The  correctness  of  the  operations  indicated  by  the  table    Proof  of 

Correct- 

is  easily  appreciated  when  the  fractions  are  added  or  sub-  ness  of  the 

Moves. 

tracted.  For  example :  to  divide  the  work  into  69  parts 
thefiguresarefl  — ^==fi  — i  =  ff  — ft  =  |f;  and 
this  equals  one  division  of  the  work  or  the  desired  result, 


190  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

as  there  are  40  teeth  in  the  worm  wheel,  and  to  obtain 
1-69  of  a  complete  revolution  it  is  desired  that  40  should 
be  divided  by  69. 

To  obtain  77  divisions  the  figures  are  ^9T  -]-.^=  I  -J- 
TY  =  -7-7-  -f-  -fr  =  T~T  ==  one  division. 

This  method  of  calculation  (although  fractions  are 
involved)  is  essentially  the  same  as  that  described  on  page 

.76. 

APP™XI-  The  next  table  gives  the  movements  for  divisions  of  the 
indexings  WOrk  (absolutely,  or  within  close  limits)  from  50  to  250. 
°"1P°u"d  Where  only  one  indexing  is  indicated  the  figures  are  taken 
from  the  tables  on  pages  179  and  180,  and  where  abso- 
lutely correct  results  are  shown  by  the  compound  index- 
ing, the  figures  are  taken  from  the  last  table.  In  regard 
to  this  table,  Mr.  Gribben  writes  as  follows  : 

"  The  figures  in  the  first  column  give  the  desired  num- 
ber of  teeth,  or  the  nearest  approximations  to  the  desired 
number  of  teeth,  which  approximations  are  so  near  in  the 
instance  of  51,  53,  57,  61,67,  71,73,  79,  81,  etc.,  that  the 
error  may  be  safely  neglected. 

The  figures  in  the  second  column  give  the  moves  for  the 
index  shaft,  in  opposite  directions  when  connected  by  a 
—  sign,  and  in  the  same  direction  when  connected  by  a  -[- 
sign. 

The  figures  in  the  third  column  show  the  error  in  posi- 
tion of  the  last  space  cut  if  the  cross-slide  be  not  moved, 
and  a  gear  of  i  diametral  pitch  is  being  cut.  A  i  pitch  gear 
is  larger  than  would  be  cut  on  a  small  machine,  but  is 
taken  for  the  reason  that  from  these  figures  can  be  com- 
puted the  the  error  for  finer  pitches.  This  is  obtained  by 
dividing  the  error  for  i  pitch  by  the  number  of  the  finer 
pitch,  and  the  result  (if  of  sufficient  magnitude  to  be  taken 
into  account)  distributed  up  around  the  circumference 
as  best  it  may. 

For  instance,  if  we  wish  to  cut  112  teeth  of  6  pitch,  the 
error  in  the  last  cut  would  be  about  .00 1  inch,  which  might 
be  corrected  by  moving  the  cross-slide  .0001  inch  after 
every  n  cuts.  (See  page  196.) 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


Compound  Index  Movementson  the  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  Design 

1893,  Universal  Milling  Machines.    (Absolute  and 

Approximate.) 


NO.   OF  TEETH. 

MOVES. 

ERROR  ON  ONE  DIAM- 
ETRAL PITCH   GEAR. 

TIMES  AROUND. 

50. 

tt 

51.0001 

8|f  —  if 

.0002 

11 

52. 

ft 

53.0001 

6ff-A 

.0002 

54. 

It 

55. 

tt 

56. 

It 

56.9999 

4|t  +  A 

.0003 

7 

58. 

It 

58.9997 

W  +  it 

.0009 

11 

60. 

ft 

60.9999 

3tf  +  A 

.0003 

6 

62. 

ft 

62.9994 

4^9.  _|_    1| 

.0019 

8 

64. 

it 

65. 

ft 

66. 

ft 

67.0002 

2||  -f  £| 

.0005 

5 

68. 
6Q 

it 

Ut7. 

70. 

If 

70.9999 

3f  T  —  ft 

.0005 

6 

72. 

if 

73.0001 

of  f  —  A 

.0002 

12 

74. 

ft 

75. 

13 

76. 

it 

77. 

*9T  +  A 

78. 

ft 

79.0002 

2ft  +  A 

.0005 

6 

80. 

iff 

80.9999 

•5?5r  —  A 

.0003 

10 

82. 

ft 

83.0003 

3f  f  —  A 

.0011 

8 

84. 

it 

85. 

A 

86. 

ft 

87. 

H-tt 

1 

88. 

if 

89.0001 

3||  —  ^ 

.0005. 

8 

90. 

W 

192 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


Compound  Index  Movements  on  the  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  Design 

1893,  Universal  Milling  Machines.    (Absolute  and 

Approximate.) 


NO.   OF  TEETH. 

MOVES. 

ERROR  ON  ONE  DIAM- 
ETRAL   PITCH  GEAR. 

TIMES  AROUND. 

91. 

A  +  it 

92. 

H 

93. 

3111 
TTl     i     ~5~5 

94. 

& 

• 

95. 

A 

96. 

A  +  A 

96.9999 

4||  —  TS 

.0004 

11 

98. 

it 

99. 

tf-A 

100. 

.  A 

101.0001 

4f  f  —  it 

.0003 

11 

102.0002 

4j|  -fa 

.0007 

11 

103.0003 

i  A  +  if 

.0010 

4 

104. 

it 

105. 

A 

106.0003 

aff  +  tt 

.0009 

9 

107.0004 

2ft  -A 

.0012 

7 

108. 

H 

108.9998 

2it  +  A 

.0006 

7 

110. 

it 

111.0001 

3|9   _]_  ^ 

.0003 

11 

111.9980 

4if  —  it 

.0063 

11 

112.9999 

3|f-it 

.0004 

9 

113.9996 

Hf  +  It 

.0014 

7 

115. 

A 

116. 

it 

117.0001 

.0002 

20 

117.9994 

lT8-g  4-  ft 

.0019 

5 

119.0005 

3A-H 

.0015 

8 

120. 

it 

120.9982 

lit  -it 

.0055 

3 

122.0003 

.0008 

11 

123.0006 

4t  +  H 

.0018 

5 

124. 

125.0010 

II 

.0031 

8 

125.9985 

3i.|  ^ 

.0047 

11 

127.0002 

2ft  +  it 

.0006 

9 

128. 

A 

128.9997 

.0011 

19 

130. 

if 

130.9990 

2|o  _^_  2^ 

.0031 

11 

132. 

it 

BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


193 


Compound  Index  Movements  on  the  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  Design 

1893,  Universal  Milling  Machines.    (Absolute  and 

Approximate.) 


NO.  OF  TEETH. 

MOVES. 

ERROR  ON  ONE  DIAM- 
ETRAL PITCH  GEAR. 

TIMES  AROUND. 

133.0006 

3ft  -  it 

.0020 

11 

134.0002 

8*f  +  it 

.0007 

13 

135. 

28T 

136. 

TV 

137.0001 

8H-A 

.0005 

11 

138. 

44  -A 

138.9998 

m  +  ft 

.0005 

11 

140. 

it 

141.0007 

Ht  +  ft 

.0022 

8 

141.9998 

4A  +  it 

.0006 

15 

142.9991 

Iff  -it 

.0029 

5 

144. 

T58 

145. 

•289 

145.9994 

2A-A- 

.0018 

7 

147. 

it  -  A 

148. 

if 

149.0003 

^A  —  A 

.0010 

11 

150. 

T45 

151.0008 

142.  ^ 

.0024 

7 

152. 

A 

153.0002 

2|5  ?^ 

.0005 

11 

154. 

^8_  J^ 

155. 

A 

156. 

it 

157.0003 

2ff  +  A 

.0011 

11 

157.9990 

.0031 

19 

159.0002 

O  7   1   1  6 
z"S"f  1  ?¥ 

.0007 

10 

160. 

161.0016 

24*  -A 

.0051 

9 

161.9982 

.0057 

7 

162.9996 

3^.  || 

.0013 

11 

164. 

if 

165. 

T5 

165.9989 

HI  +  it 

.0035 

7 

166.9995 

2A  +  A 

.0015 

9 

168. 

169.0005 

iff  +  it  , 

.0016 

9 

170. 

170.9997 

iff  +  A 

.0008 

7 

172. 

if 

173.0003 

1A  +  ii 

.0011- 

6 

194 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


Compound  Index  Movements  on  the  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  Design 

1893,  Universal  Milling  Machines.    (Absolute  and 

Approximate.) 


NO.  OF  TEETH. 

MOVES. 

ERROR  ON  ONE  DIAM- 
ETRAL PITCH  GEAR. 

TIMES  AROUND. 

174. 

H-A 

174.9964 

i  A  +  A 

.0112 

6 

176.0024 

lif  +  if 

.0075 

7 

•  176.9991 

2if  +  & 

'.0027 

11 

177.9995 

3ff  +  B 

.0014 

17 

179.0002 

2|7  —  if 

.0006 

11 

180. 

A 

180.9996 

2  A  +  if 

.0012 

11 

182. 

A  +  ?V 

183.0003 

1  2A  _1_  8 

J-ft  r^  ?7 

.0009 

8 

184. 

A 

185. 

A 

186. 

B-B 

186.9982 

m  +  if 

.0056 

8 

188. 

10 

189.0015 

2ff  —  if 

.0046 

11 

190. 

A 

191.0015 

iff  +  if 

.0046 

10 

191.9983 

m  -  if 

.0055 

11 

193.0007 

ITT  —  if 

.0021 

4 

193.9981 

2|2  £8 

.0061 

11 

195. 

A 

196. 

if 

196.9996 

m  +  if 

.0013 

11 

198. 

A  +  A 

199.0005 

2H-A 

.0014 

11 

200. 

fA 

201.0003 

.0011 

13 

201.9991 

3ii  +  A 

.0028 

17 

202.9979 

iff  +  A 

.0065 

9 

203.9992 

.0025 

13 

205. 

A 

206.0007 

2f  f  +  A 

.0023 

15 

206.9991 

0^  2| 

.0029 

14 

207.9980 

lif  +  if 

.0063 

9 

208.9987 

A  +  & 

.0041 

2 

210. 

A 

211.0013 

iff  +  if 

.0039 

11 

211.9995 

3X  _j_  6 

.0017 

17 

212.9990 

IB  +  4\ 

.0033 

8 

214.0003 

.0010 

15 

BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


Compound  Index  Movements  on  the  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  Design 

1893,  Universal  Milling  Machines.     (Absolute  and 

Approximate.) 


NO.    OF  TEETH. 

MOVES. 

ERROR  ON  ONE  DIAM- 
ETRAL PITCH. 

TIMES  AROUND. 

215. 

g 
¥7 

216. 

A 

217.0014 

2  A  +  it 

.0044 

13 

217.9986 

iff  -A 

.0042 

7 

218.9989 

3ft  -B 

.0034 

19 

220. 

A 

220.9996 

1A-A 

.0013 

6 

222.0019 

2A-B 

.0060 

11 

222.9998 

2ft  +  if 

.0005 

16 

223.9955 

2  A  +  & 

.0143 

13 

225. 

A-  A 

225.9995 

HI  +  it 

.0014 

13 

226.9999 

3A  +  A 

.0005 

18 

228.0010 

2A-H 

.0032 

11 

229.0002 

2H-H 

.0007 

12 

230. 

A 

231. 

A  +  A 

232. 

A 

233.0007 

iff  +  A 

.0022 

11 

234.0022 

2ft  +  A 

.0068 

17 

235. 

A 

236.0007 

2ft  +  A 

.0021 

17 

236.9998 

2#-A 

.0006 

13 

237.9992 

2A  +  M 

.0024 

15 

238.9997 

iff  +  if 

.0008 

11 

240. 

A 

240.9997 

iA  +  tt 

.0010 

9 

241.9996 

8ff-A 

.0013 

15 

242.9997 

iff  -A 

.0009 

10 

243.9986 

2tt  +  it 

.0044 

17 

245. 

A 

246.0012 

i^-it 

.0037 

5 

247.0002 

2it-A 

.0007 

14 

248. 

A 

249.0002 

3A-A 

.0005 

19 

250.0027 

2A-A 

.0083 

13 

196 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.     CO. 


If  the  index  head  is  set  for  a  lower  number  than  the 
desired  one,  then  the  larger  of  the  two  moves  must  carry 
the  top  of  blank  in  the  opposite  direction  from  that  in 
which  the  cross-slide  is  moved,  while  if  the  index  head  is 
set  for  a  higher  number  than  the  desired  one,  then  the 
larger  of  the  two  moves  must  carry  the  top  of  blank  in  the 
same  direction  as  that  in  which  the  cross-slide  is  moved." 

The  foregoing  tables  were  prepared  with  reference  to 
the  No.  i  Universal  Milling  Machine,  as  this  machine  is 
most  frequently  used  for  the  operations  requiring  index- 
ing mechanism.  When,  however,  the  movements  involve 
the  use  of  the  two  outer  circles  of  holes  of  the  index  plate, 
the  figures  given  can  be  applied  to  the  No.  4  Universal 
Milling  Mnchine,  the  crank  pin  of  this  machine  being 
used,  at  such  times,  in  the  outer  circle  of  holes,  and  the 
back  pin  in  the  second  circle. 

The  following  table  gives  a  number  of  movements  of 
the  No.  4  machine  by  the  compound  method  : 


Compound  Index  Movements  on  the  No.  4  Universal 
Milling  Machine. 


NO.  OP    DIVISIONS. 

MOVES. 

NO.   OP  DIVISIONS. 

MOVES. 

57 

T  JT  "T"  T'U 

217 

H-tt 

93 

¥T  ~f~  A 

228 

ft-A 

114 

if  —  A 

282 

if  —  ?V 

141 

ft  -If 

285 

If  -if 

171 

T87  —  T4? 

304 

A~A 

186 

it-tf 

BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


I97 


The  following  table  is  the  result  of  Mr.  Schneider's 
ingenious  suggestion,  that  sometimes  it  is  not  necessary  to 
use  the  compound  indexing  for  obtaining  each  division 
of  the  work,  but  that  it  is  often  sufficient  to  use  the 
method  once  in  going  around  the  work  twice  or  twice  in 
going  around  three  times,  etc.  For  example  :  96  divis- 
ions may  be  obtained  by  indexing  for  48  and  going  com- 
pletely around  the  work  in  the  ordinary  way,  then  dividing 
one  of  the  spaces  in  equal  parts,  or  obtaining  one  of 
the  desired  96  divisions  by  the  compound  method  (-f^  -[- 
•^),  and  finally  by  again  going  around  the  work,  indexing 
as  at  first  for  48  divisions  : 


Compound  Index  Movements    for    Nos.    1,  2,  3  and  4,  Design 
1893,  Universal  Milling  Machines    (Schneider's  Method.) 


DUMBER   OF 
TEETH. 

SET  FOR 

TIMES 
AROUND. 

ORDINARY 
MOVES. 

COMPOUND 
MOVES. 

NUMBEROF 
COMPOUND 
MOVES. 

69 

23 

3 

IB 

|1_11 

2 

87 

29 

3 

Hi 

B-H 

2 

91 

13 

*7 

3739 

A  +  if 

6 

93 

31 

0 

iA 

A  +  H 

2 

96 

48 

2 

if 

T38    +   A 

1 

138 

46 

3 

If 

H-A 

2 

174 

58 

3 

ft 

H-A 

2 

182 

26 

7 

IB 

A  +  ?V 

6 

186 

62 

3 

ff 

if  —  H 

2 

225 

45 

5 

If 

A  -  A 

4 

231 

21 

11 

itt 

^  +  A 

10 

253 

23 

11 

IB 

B-B 

10 

259 

37 

7 

iA 

H-A 

6 

272 

136 

2 

A 

ift  —  T7 

1 

273 

39 

7 

!A 

B.-B 

6 

276 

92 

0 

•J 

H 

H-H 

2 

287 

41 

1 

If 

if  -  *6r 

6 

288 

144 

2 

A 

A  —  A 

1 

301 

43 

7 

ff 

if  -if 

6 

304 

152 

2 

A 

i&  —  A 

1 

198 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


Adjustable  jn  hjs  articles  upon  compounding  indexing,  Mr.  Fred. 
J.  Miller  has  shown  how  much  the  usefulness  of  an  index 
plate  is  increased  if  the  back  pin  of  the  mechanism  is 
made  adjustable,  the  same  as  the  front  pin,  and  Mr.  Miller 
holds  a  patent  on  Index  Centres,  of  which  we  hold  a 
shop  right,  which  is  important  in  this  connection.  When 
such  an  adjustment  is  applied  to  our  machines,  the 
number  of  the  attainable  movements  is  increased.  The 
following  table  is  indicative  of  this  : 

COMPOUND    INDEX    MOVEMENTS. 

Extra  Divisions  Obtained  by  Making  the  Back  Pin  Adjust- 
able on  Universal  Milling  Machines. 


NO.   OF  DIVISIONS. 

MOVES. 

NO.   OP  DIVISIONS. 

MOVES. 

51 

iV  +  if 

204 

A-A 

57 

T68+lV 

207 

A-A 

63 

H  +  137 

217 

tt-H 

102 

A  +  A 

222 

H-H 

111 

A  +  U 

228 

A  -A 

114 

il-T% 

246 

H-ft 

123 

It  -if 

252 

A  +  A 

126 

A+A 

255 

A-  A 

129 

tt-A 

258 

II  -If 

141 

»-» 

261 

A-A 

153 

tt-A 

279 

13T  +  A 

161 

A  —  53r 

282 

H-A 

171 

A-A 

285 

A-A 

189 

A-A 

306 

A-A 

192 

A-f  A 

Mr.  Miller  has  given  a  great  deal  of  attention  to  the 
results  obtained  by  the  use  of  two  adjustable  pins  in  con- 
nection with  an  index  plate,  and  his  tables  are  interesting 
and,  in  many  instances,  would  be  of  great  value.  We  do 
not  reproduce  them,  however,  as  none  happen  to  be  appli- 
cable to  the  index  plates  regularly  furnished  with  the 
machines. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


'99 


ill 


BEVEL  GEARS. 


200  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG,    CO. 


CUTTING  BEVEL  GEARS  IN  4  UNIVERSAL  MILLING 
MACHINE. 


An  article  written  by  Mr.  O.  J.  Beale  appeared  in  the 
American  Machinist,  June  20,  189 5, with  the  above  title  and 
covers  this  subject  most  thoroughly.  The  following  is  a 
reprint  of  this  article,  together  with  the  illustrations  : 

"  Bevel  gears  connect  shafts  whose  axes  meet  when  suffi- 
ciently prolonged.  The  teeth  of  bevel  gears  are  formed 
about  the  f  rustrums  of  cones  whose  apexes  are  at  the  same 
point  where  the  shafts  meet.  In  Fig.  63  we  have  the  axes 
A  O  and  B  O,  meeting  at  O,  and  the  apexes  of  the  two 
cones  are  also  at  O.  If,  in  any  bevel  gear,  the  teeth  were 
sufficiently  prolonged  toward  the  apex,  they  would  become 
infinitely  small ;  that  is,  the  teeth  would  all  end  in  a  point, 
or  vanish  at  O.  We  can  also  consider  a  bevel  gear  as 
beginning  at  the  apex  and  becoming  larger  and  larger  as 
we  go  away  from  the  apex. 

"  Fig.  64  is  a  section  of  a  pair  of  bevel  gears,  the  gear  C 
D  being  twice  as  large  as  C  I.  The  outer  surface  of  a 
tooth,  J  E,  Fig.  64,  is  called  its  face.  The  distance  C  c 
is  called  the  length  of  the  face  of  tooth,  which  is  often 
designated  by  the  letter  F  ;  strictly,  the  distance  J  E  is 
longer  than  C  c,  but  the  difference  is  not  usually  recog- 
nized. The  outer  part  of  a  tooth  at  C  is  called  its  large 
end  and  the  inner  part  C  the  small  end.  In  speaking  of 
the  pitch  of  bevel  gears  we  always  name  that  at  the  large 
end  or  at  the  large  pitch  circle,  thus  the  pitch  of  a  bevel 
gear,  at  its  large  pitch  circle,  corresponds  to  that  of  a  spur 
gear.  The  sizes  of  the  teeth  at  the  small  end  are  in  the 
same  proportion  to  those  at  the  large  end  as  the  distance 
O  C  is  to  the  apex  distance  O  C,  that  is,  we  can  figure  the 
sizes  as  we  would  figure  the  thickness  of  a  wedge  at  any 
point,  after  we  know  the  length  and  the  thickness  at  the 


BROWN    A     SHARPE    MFG.   .CO.  2OI 

butt  end.  There  are  convenient  tables  for  spur  gear  teeth 
in  Brown  &  Sharpe's  *  Practical  Treatise  on  Gearing.' 

"  Nothing  is  gained  by  having  the  length  of  face  J  E 
longer  than  five  times  the  tooth  thickness  at  the  large  pitch 
circle,  and  even  this  is  too  long  when  it  is  more  than  a 
third  of  the  apex  distance  C  O.  To  cut  a  bevel  gear  with 
a  rotary  cutter,  as  in  Fig.  65,  is  at  best  but  a  compromise, 
because  the  teeth  change  pitch  from  end  to  end,  so  that 
the  cutter,  being  of  the  right  shape  for  the  large  ends  of 
the  teeth,  cannot  be  right  for  the  small  ends,  and  the  vari- 
ation is  too  great  when  the  length  of  face  is  longer  than  a 
third  of  the  apex  distance.  Frequently  the  teeth  have  to  be 
be  rounded  over  at  the  small  ends  by  filing ;  the  longer 
the  face  the  more  we  have  to  file. 

"  The  data  for  bevel  gears  can  be  figured  by  trigonome- 
try, and  without  a  drawing,  as  in  Brown  &  Sharpe's  '  For- 
mulas in  Gearing ;  '  they  can  also  be  obtained  by  the  help 
of  measurement  of  a  drawing.  We  will  suppose  that  we 
have  a  drawing,  and  that  we  have  the  gear  blanks  turned 
correctly  enough  to  gauge  from  in  making  our  settings  for 
cutting  the  teeth.  It  is  possible  to  cut  a  good  gear  from  a 
blank  somewhat  incorrectly  turned,  but  it  is  quite  incon- 
venient to  make  the  settings  without  guiding  by  the 
blank. 

"  These  data  are  needed  before  beginning  to  cut  : 

"  The  pitch  and  the  number  of  teeth,  the  same  as  for 
spur  gears. 

"The  number  of  the  cutter,  so  as  to  select  one  of  correct 
form,  Brown  &  Sharpe  have  a  system  of  eight  cutters  for 
each  pitch.  A  pair  of  bevel  gears  having  different  num- 
bers of  teeth  may  require  two  cutters. 

"The  whole  depth  of  the  tooth  spaces  both  at  the  outer 
and  inner  ends,  which  can  be  designated  by  D"  -j-  f  at  the 
outer  end,  and  by  D'"  -(-f  at  the  inner  end. 

"  The  thickness  of  the  teeth  at  the  outer  and  inner  pitch 
lines,  which  we  will  designate  by  t  at  the  outer,  and  by  t' 
at  the  inner  end. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

"  The  heights  of  the  teeth  above  the  two  pitch  lines,  s  at 
the  outer  end  and  s'  at  the  inner. 

"  The  cutting  angles,  or  the  angles  that  the  path  of  the 
cutter  makes  with  the  axes  of  the  gears.  In  Fig.  64  the 
cutting  angle  for  the  gear  C  D  is  A  O  G,  and  the  cutting 
angle  for  the  pinion  is  B  O  H.  In  Fig.  66  a  cutter  is  shown 
passing  through  a  tooth  space  along  the  line  O  G,  the 
gear  being  set  to  the  cutting  angle  A  O  G. 

"The  lines  GO  and  H  O.  Fig.  64,  are  called  working 
depth  lines,  because  they  show  the  depth  that  the  teeth  of 
the  two  gears  engage.  The  spaces  are  cut  deeper  than 
these  lines  an  amount  which  is  called  the  clearance  or  f ; 
this  f  or  clearance  is  the  same  at  both  ends  of  the  teeth, 
when  cut  with  a  rotary  cutter. 

"  Brown  &  Sharpe  have  kindly  offered  to  turn  up  a  pair 
of  blanks  and  cut  them,  while  I  note  down  the  machine 
settings.  I  choose  gears  of  8  pitch,  24  and  12  teeth,  ^ 
inch  face,  shown  in  Figs.  64  and  72. 

"  The  shape  of  the  teeth  of  one  of  these  gears  differs  so 
much  from  that  in  the  other  gear  that  two  cutters  are 
required.  The  cutters  may  be  determined  as  follows : 
Twice  the  length  of  the  line  C  K  (Fig.  64)  in  inches,  per- 
pendicular to  C  O,  multiplied  by  the  diametrial  pitch, 
equals  the  number  of  teeth  for  which  to  select  a  cutter,  as 
to  form,  to  cut  the  twelve-tooth  gear.  This  number  is 
about  13,  indicating  a  No.  8  cutter.  In  the  same  way, 
multiplying  twice  the  corresponding  line  in  the  other  gear 
by  the  diametrial  pitch,  we  have  about  54,  calling  for  a 
No.  3  cutter.  C  K  is  sometimes  called  the  back  cone 
radius. 

"  This  way  of  selecting  cutters  is  based  upon  the  idea  of 
shaping  the  teeth  as  near  right  at  the  large  end  as  practi- 
cable, and  then  to  file  the  small  ends  where  the  cutter  has 
not  rounded  them  over  enough.  In  Fig.  69  the  tooth  L 
has  been  cut  to  thickness  at  both  pitch  lines,  but  it  must 
still  be  rounded  at  the  inner  end,  or  at  the  part  corres- 
ponding to  J  in  Fig.  64.  The  teeth  M  M,  Fig.  69,  have 
been  filed.  In  thus  rounding  the  teeth  we  must  avoid 
making  them  any  thinner  at  the  pitch  line. 


BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


203 


Fig.   67. 


Fig.   66. 


204  BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

"  In  cutting  a  bevel  gear  the  finished  spaces  are  not 
always  of  the  same  form  as  the  cutter  might  be  expected 
to  make,  because  of  the  changes  in  the  position  of   the 
gear  blank  in  order  to  cut  the  two  sides  of  the  spaces. 
The  cutter,  of  course,  being  thin  enough  for  the  small  end 
of  a  space,  the  large  end  of  a  space  is  cut  to  the  required 
width  by  rotating  the  blank  and  adjusting  sidewise,  and 
we  usually  cut  twice  through  each  space.     Thus  in  Fig.  65 
a  gear  is  in  position  to  have  a  space  widened  at  the  large 
end  e,  and  the  last  chip  to  be  taken  off  the  tooth  on  the 
right  of  the  cutter,  the  blank  having  been  moved  to  the 
right  and  then   rotated  in  the  direction  of  the  arrow.     It 
may  be  well  to  remerrrber  that  in  setting  to  finish  the  side 
of  a  tooth  the  gear  blank  is  moved  sidewise  in  the  direc- 
tion to  take  this  tooth  away  from  the  cutter,  and  then  the 
blank  is  rotated  by  indexing  the  spindle  to  bring  the  tooth 
up  against  the  cutter.     Now  this  tends  not  only  to  cut  the 
space   wider  at  the  largest  pitch  circle,  but  also  to  cut 
still  more  off  at  the  face  of  the  tooth  ;  that  is,  the  teeth 
may  be  cut  rather  thin  at  the  ,f  ace,  and  left  rather  thick  at 
the  roots.     This  tendency  is'greater  as  a  cutting  angle  B 
O  H,  Fig.  64,  is  smaller  or  as  a  bevel  gear  is  more  like  a 
spur  gear,  because  when  the  cutting  angle  is  small  the 
blank  must  be   rotated  through  a  greater  arc  in  order  to 
set  to  cut  the  right  tooth  thickness  at  the   outer  pitch  cir- 
cle.    This  can  be  understood  by  Figs.  67  and  70  ;  in  Fig. 
67  the  teeth  are  cut  square  across  the  axis,  and  the  rota- 
tion of  the  blank  in  order  to  cut  spaces  wider  at  the  out- 
side has  not  narrowed  the  faces  of  the  teeth  any  more 
than  the  roots.     The  different  positions  of  the  cutter  in  both 
the  unfinished  and  finished  spaces  is  shown  by  the  dotted 
lines.    Now  as  the  cutting  angle  of  a  bevel  gear  approaches 
a  right  angle,  as  in  Fig.  67,  we  find- less  and  less  tendency 
to  cut  the  tooth  faces  too  narrow.     In  Fig.  70  a  cutter  is 
passing  through  a  space  in  a  spur   gear,  which  has  no 
cutting  angle  ;  it  is   clear  that   any  rotation  of  this  blank 
tends  directly  to  change  the  shape  of  the  teeth  as  regards 
the  thickness  of  the  face  and  the  root.     In  this  particular 


BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


205 


gun  n 

u>Kl444iiy»        i  M  1 1 1       ji  1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1| 

jESan    IU|b~ 


Fig.  68. 


Fiff.  75. 


Fig. 74. 


fig.   72. 


206  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

setting,  shown  by  the  centre  lines  of  the  cutter  and  of  the 
gear,  the  roots  are  not  changed  while  the  faces  are  made 
considerably  thinner,  as  indicated  by  the  dotted  lines. 
This  change  in  the  shape  of  tht  spaces  caused  by  the  ro- 
tation of  the  blank  may  be  so  great  as  to  require  the  sub- 
stitution of  a  cutter  that  is  narrower  at  e  e',  Fig.  65,  that  is, 
a  cutter  for  cutting  a  higher-numbered  gear.  In  using 
the  cutter  for  a  higher-numbere'd  gear  the  radius  of 
curvature  of  the  tooth  sides  is  lengthened,  but  the  longer 
tooth  curves  are  not  so  objectionable  as  the  thin  tooth 
faces. 

"In  the  order  for  cutting  the  gears,  Fig.  72,  the  foreman 
of  the  gear  department  calls  for  a  No.  6  cutter  for  1 7  to 
20  teeth  to  cut  the  i2-tooth  gear,  instead  of  a  No.  8, 
as  I  have  just  figured.  This  is  a  little  surprising,  but  it  is 
still  more  surprising  to  be  told  by  the  foreman  of  the  cut- 
ter department  that  he  would  fill  an  order  for  a  cutter  to 
cut  this  same  gear  by  sending  a  No.  8  for  12  to  13  teeth. 
I  told  him  about  the  gear  order,  and  he  replied,  *  I  don't 
know  what  they  do  over  there,  but  I  should  think  they 
work  by  guess.  I  make  cutters  according  to  the  rule  in 
the  catalogue.  If  there  is  a  better  rule  I  should  like  to 
have  it.  We  seldom  or  never  have  any  fault  found  with 
bevel  gear  cutters  because  they  round  the  teeth  over  too 
much,  but  we  have  had  complaints  because  the  teeth  are 
not  rounded  enough.' 

"  From  this  it  might  be  supposed  that  Brown  &  Sharpe 
would  use  one  thing  on  their  own  work,  and  send  their 
customer  another,  but  such  a  supposition  would  not  be 
*  fully  warranted.  As  I  have  said,  the  cutting  of  a  bevel 
gear  with  a  rotary  cutter,  as  in  Fig.  65,  is  a  compromise. 
The  necessity  for  a  compromise  is  evident  when  we  con- 
sider that  an  8-pitch  gear  at  one  end  may  run  down  to  12 
pitch  at  the  other. 

"  Different  workmen  prefer  to  compromise  in- different 
ways.  A  workman  can  avoid  much  filing  of  the  teeth  by 
the  use  of  the  No.  8  cutter,  but  the  tooth  faces  will  be  con- 
siderably too  thin  at  the  large  ends.  He  can  also  avoid 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

some  filing  by  an  extra  cut  upon  each  side  of  the  teeth  at 
the  small  ends,  making  four  cuts  in  all.  I  have  known 
this  compromise  with  a  coarse  pitch  and  long  face.  If  the 
faces  are  short  and  the  pitch  is  fine  he  can  sink  the  cutter 
below  the  regular  depth  at  the  outside,  and  cut  only  once 
around ;  this  compromise  is  little  liked,  and  is  seldom 
employed  ;  it  may  require  a  special  form  and  thickness  of 
cutter.  The  best  compromise  is  to  cut  twice  around,  shap- 
ing the  teeth  as  nearly  correct  as  practicable  at  the  large 
ends,  and  then  file  the  small  ends  in  low-numbered  gears, 
or  those  of  fewer  than  twenty  teeth.  A  workman  can  soon 
acquire  the  skill  to  file  the  teeth  almost  as  perfect  as  they 
can  be  planed  from  a  template.  Still  most  workmen  pre- 
fer not  to  file  the  i2-tooth  gear,  Fig.  64,  which  is  the  rea- 
son why  the  rule  in  the  catalogue  is  followed  in  filling  an 
order  for  a  gear  cutter. 

"  In  the  selection  of  a  cutter,  the  foreman  of  the  cutting 
department  tells  me  that  he  cannot  give  a  definite  rule,  and 
that  he  is  open  to  the  criticism  of  guessing.  If  a  pinion  of 
only  12  teeth  is  to  run  with  a  gear  two  or  more  times  as 
large,  he  takes  a  cutter  shaped  for  17  to  20  teeth,  instead 
of  the  usual  12  to  13  teeth.  For  any  gears  higher  than 
25  teeth  he  would  adhere  to  the  rule,  and  take  the  cutter 
indicated  by  the  length  of  the  line  C  K,  Fig.  64.  If  he 
has  many  gears  of  the  same  size,  he  cuts  one  pair  and 
files  them  to  run  together,  in  order  to  decide  definitely  as 
to  the  cutters. 

"  The  sizes  of  the  tooth  parts  at  the  large  end  are  copied 
right  from  a  table  of  spur  gear  teeth.  The  distance  O  c, 
Fig.  64,  is  seven-tenths  the  apex  distance  O  C,  so  that  the 
sizes  of  the  tooth  parts  at  the  small  end,  all  except  f,  or 
the  clearance,  are  seven-tenths  the  large.  The  order  goes 
to  the  workman  in  this  form,  P  standing  for  diametral 
pitch,  and  N  for  the  number  of  teeth  : 


^5; 

UNIVERSITY 

^CALIFORNVN 


208 


BROWN    A    SHARPE    MFG.     CO. 


FIG.  73. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  209 

LARGE    GEAR. 
P  =      8 

N  =   24 

D"  +  f  =  .270"      D'"  +  f=  .195" 
t  =  .196"  t'  =  .137" 

s   =  .I25"  S'  =    .087'' 

Cutting  angle  =59°  10'. 

SMALL     GEAR. 

N  =    12. 

Cutting  angle  =  22°  18'. 
Cutters,  Nos.  3  and  6,  8  P,  bevel. 

"  Before  beginning  to  cut,  the  bed  S,  Fig.  73,  is  set  to 
zero.  The  dial  pointer  of  the  cross  feed  screw  T  is  set 
and  noted,  so  that  we  can  adjust  the  blank  to  any  required 
distance  out  of  centre  with  the  cutter.  The  spiral  head 
N  is  moved  up  to  the  cutting  angle,  which  for  our  24-tooth 
gear  is  59°  ic/;  we  guess  at  the  -J-  degree  more  than  59 
degrees. 

"  Mark  the  depth  of  cut  at  the  outside  as  in  Fig.  74.  It 
is  also  well  enough  to  mark  the  depth  at  the  inside,  as  a 
check.  The  thickness  of  the  teeth  at  the  outside  is  con- 
veniently determined  by  the  solid  gauge,  Fig.  75.  The 
vernier  caliper,  Fig.  68,  will  measure  different  sizes.  If 
we  do  not  have  the  vernier  caliper,  a  gauge  like  Fig.  75, 
filed  to  the  thickness  at  the  small  ends,  will  answer. 

"  The  index  having  been  set  to  divide  to  the  right  num- 
ber, our  workman  cuts  two  spaces  central  with  the  blank, 
leaving  a  tooth  between  that  is  a  little  too  thick,  as  in  the 
upper  part  of  Fig.  69.  The  tooth  has  to  be  cut  away  more 
in  proportion  from  the  large  than  from  the  small  end, 
which  is  the  reason  for  setting  the  blank  out  of  centre,  as 
in  Fig.  65. 

"  It  is  important  to  remember  that  the  part  of  the  cutter 
that  is  finishing  one  side  of  a  tooth  at  the  pitch  line 
should  be  central  with  the  gear  blank,  in  order  to  know  at 
once  in  which  direction  to  set  the  blank  out  of  centre. 


2IO  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

We  cannot  readily  tell  how  much  out  of  centre  to  set  the 
blank  until  we  have  cut  and  tried,  because  the  same  part 
of  a  cutter  does  not  cut  to  the  pitch  line  at  both  ends  of 
the  tooth.  As  a  trial  distance  out  of  centre,  we  can  take 
about  one-tenth  to  one-eighth  of  the  thickness  of  the 
teeth  at  the  large  end.  The  actual  distance  out  of  centre 
for  the  i2-tooth  gear  is  .021  inch,  and  for  the  24-tooth 
.030  inch,  when  using  the  cutters. listed  in  the  catalogue. 

"After  a  little  practice  a  workman  can  set  his  blank  the 
trial  distance  out  of  centre,  and  take  his  first  cuts,  without 
making  any  central  cuts  at  all,  but  it  is  safer  to  take  cen- 
tral cuts  like  the  upper  ones  in  Fig.  69.  The  depth  of  the 
cuts  is  controlled  by  the  shaft  U,  Fig.  73.  Now,  by 
means  of  the  screw  T,  set  out  of  centre  the  trial  distance, 
which  can  be  one-tenth  the  thickness  of  the  tooth  at  the 
large  end  in  a  i2-tooth  gear,  and  from  that  to  one-eighth 
the  thickness  in  a  24-tooth  gear  and  larger.  The  direc- 
tion out  of  centre  is  indicated  in  Fig.  65,  which  is  to  move 
the  tooth  away  from  the  cutter,  by  turning  the  cross-feed 
screw  T,  Fig.  73  ;  the  tooth  is  then  rotated  up  against  the 
cutter  in  the  direction  of  the  arrow,  Fig.  65,  by  turning 
the  index  crank  R,  Fig.  73,  just  enough  to  trim  the  side 
of  the  tooth  as  shown  in  Fig.  65.  The  blank  is  now  set 
the  same  distance  out  of  centre  in  the  other  direction, 
rotated  contrary  to  the  arrow,  Fig.  65,  and  the  other  side 
of  the  tooth  is  trimmed  until  one  end  is  nearly  down  to  the 
right  thickness.  If  now  the  thickness  of  the  small  end  is 
in  the  same  proportion  to  the  large  end  as  O  c  is  to  O  C 
in  Fig.  64,  we  can  at  once  trim  the  tooth  to  the  right 
thickness  by  turning  the  index  crank  R,  Fig.  73.  The 
object  of  setting  out  of  centre  is  to  trim  more  from  the 
large  end  e',  Fig.  65  ;  if  now  we  find  that  by  our  two  set- 
tings the  tooth  is  still  going  to  be  too  thick  at  e',  when  the 
small  end  is  right,  the  out  of  centre  distance  must  be 
increased. 

"An  easy  way  to  remember  this  principle  is  this  :  Too 
much  out  of  centre  leaves  the  small  end  of  the  tooth  too 


BROWN    &     SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  211 

thick,  while  too  little  out  of  centre  leaves  the  small  end  too 
thin. 

"After  the  proper  distance  out  of  centre  has  been  learned, 
the  teeth  can  be  finish-cut  by  going  around  out  of  centre, 
first  on  one  side,  and  then  on  the  other,  without  cutting  any 
central  spaces  at  all.  If,  however,  a  gear  is  coarser  than  5- 
pitch  diametral,  it  is  sometimes  well  enough  to  cut  all  the 
spaces  central  at  first. 

"  Blanks  are  not  always  turned  nearly  enough  alike  to  be 
cut  without  a  different  setting  of  the  machine  for  different 
blanks.  If  the  hubs  vary  in  length,  the  height  of  the  knee 
Q,  Fig.  73,  has  to  be  varied.  In  thus  varying,  the  same 
depth  of  cut  or  the  exact  D"  -f-  f  may  not  always  be 
reached.  A  slight  difference  in  the  depth  is  not  so 
objectionable  as  the  incorrect  tooth  thickness  that  it  may 
cause,  hence  it  is  well,  after  cutting  once  around  and  finish- 
ing one  side  of  the  teeth,  to  adjust  the  spindle  N,  by 
means  of  the  index  crank  R,  until  the  right  tooth  thick- 
ness is  obtained,  paying  more  attention  to  the  tooth  thick- 
ness than  to  the  number  of  index  spaces  covered  by  the 
crank.  Of  course,  if  the  blanks  are  alike,  it  is  easier  to 
count  the  index  spaces  in  passing  from  one  side  of  the 
tooth  to  the  other. 

"After  a  gear  is  cut  and  before  it  is  filed  it  is  sometimes 
not  a  very  satisfactory  looking  piece  of  work.  In  Fig.  69 
the  tooth  L  is  as  the  cutter  left  it,  and  is  ready  to  be  filed 
to  the  shape  of  the  teeth  M  M." 


212  BROWN    &     SHARPE     MFG.    CO. 


DSE  OF  MILLING  MACHINES. 

CUTTING  SPIRALS  WITH    UNIVERSAL  MILLING 
MACHINES. 


of  cSng"  The  indexing  head  stock  or  spiral  head,  as  indicated  in 
Gears,  connection  with  the  descriptions  of  the  Univeral  Milling 
Machines,  is  used  for  cutting  spirals,  the  flutes  of  twist 
drills,  for  example,  as  well  as  for  indexing  or  dividing.  A 
positive  rotary  movement  is  given  to  the  work  while  the 
spiral  bed  is  being  moved  lengthways  by  the  feed 
screw,  and  the  velocity  ratios  of  these  movements  are 
regulated  by  four  change  gears,  shown  in  position  in  Fig. 
5,  and  known  as  the  gear  on  worm  or  worm  gear,  first 
gear  on  stud,  the  first  gear  put  on  stud,  second  gear  on 
stud  and  gear  on  screw  or  screw  gear.  The  screw  gear 
and  first  gear  on  stud  are  the  drivers  and  the  others  the 
driven  gears.  Usually  these  gears  are  of  such  ratio  that 
the  work  is  advanced  more  than  an  inch  while  making  one 
turn  and  thus  the  spirals,  cut  on  Milling  Machines,  are 
designated  in  terms  of  inches  to  one  turn,  rather  than 
turns,  or  threads  per  inch ;  for  instance  a  spiral  is  said  to 
be  of  8  inches  lead,  not  that  its  pitch  is  y&  turn  per  inch. 
The  feed  screw  of  the  spiral  bed  has  four  threads  to  the 
inch,  and  forty  turns  of  the  worm  make  one  turn  of  the 
spiral  head  spindle  ;  accordingly,  if  change  gears  of  equal 
diameter  are  used,  the  work  will  make  a  complete  turn 
while  it  is  moved  lengthways  10  inches;  that  is  the  spiral 
will  have  a  lead  of  i  o  inches.  But  this  lead  is  practically 
the  lead  of  the  machine,  as  it  is  the  resultant  of  the  action 
of  the  parts  of  the  machine  that  are  always  employed  in 
this  work,  and  is  so  regarded  in  making  the  calculations 
used  in  cutting  spirals. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  213 


In   principle,  these   calculations    are   the  same  as  for 
change  gears  of  a  Screw  Cutting  Lathe.     The  compound  G^jj£.nff  a 
ratio  of  the  driven  to  the  driving  gears  equals  in  all  cases,     Lathe. 
the  ratio  of  the  lead  of  the  required  spiral  to  the  lead  of 
the    machine.     And   this  can  be  readily  understood  by 
changing  the  diameters  of  the  gears. 

Gears  of  the  same  diameter  produce,  as  explained 
above,  a  spiral  with  a  lead  of  10  inches,  which  is  the 
same  lead  as  the  lead  of  the  machine.  Three  gears  of 
equal  diameter  and  a  driven  gear  double  this  diameter 
produce  a  spiral  with  a  lead  of  20  inches,  or  twice  the  lead 
of  the  machine  •  and  with  both  driven  gears  twice  the 
diameters  of  the  drivers,  the  ratio  being  compound,  a 
spiral  is  produced  with  a  lead  of  40  inches  or  four  times 
the  machine's  lead.  Conversely,  driving  gears  twice  the 
diameter  of  the  driven,  produce  a  spiral  with  a  lead  equal 
to  l/i  the  lead  of  the  machine  or  2^  inches. 

Expressing     the     ratios     as      fractions,      Driven  Gear3   = 

Driving  Gears 

Lead  of  Required  spimi  or  as  t^e  product  of  each  class  of  gears 

Lead   of   Machine 

determines  the  ratio,  the  head  being  double  geared,  and  as 
the  lead  of  the  machine  is  ten  inches  ^!5£L?L?.rtJ.??_G^!?  = 

Product  of  Driving  Gears 
Lead   of  Required  Spiral      That       ^      the       compound       ratio      Of       the 

Driven  to  the  Driving  Gears  may  always  be  represented 
by  a  fraction  whose  numerator  is  the  lead  to  be  cut  and 
whose  denominator  is  ten.  Or,  in  other  words,  the  ratio 
is  as  the  required  lead  is  to  10,  that  is,  if  the  required 
lead  is  20  the  ratio  is  20  :  10,  or  to  express  this  in  units 
instead  of  tens,  the  ratio  is  always  the  same  as  one  tenth 
of  the  required  lead  is  to  one.  And  frequently  this  is  a 
very  convenient  way  to  think  of  the  ratio  ;  for  example,  if 
the  ratio  of  the  lead  is  40,  the  gears  are  4:1,  If  the 
lead  is  25,  the  gears  are  2.5  :  i,  etc. 

To  illustrate  the  usual  calculations,  assume  as  in  Fig. 
5  that  a  spiral  of  12  inch  lead  is  to  be  cut.  The  com- 
pound ratio  of  the  driven  to  the  driving  gears  equals  the 
desired  lead  divided  by  10,  or  it  may  be  represented  by 
the  fraction  ^f  .  Resolving  this  into  two  factors  to  repre- 


214  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

sent  the  two  pairs  of  change  gears,  fj  =  f  x  4.  Both 
terms  of  the  first  factor  are  multiplied  by  such  a  number 
(24  in  this  instance)  that  the  resulting  numerator  arid 
denominator  will  correspond  with  the  number  of  teeth  of 
two  of  the  change  gears  furnished  with  the  machine,  (such 
multiplications  not  affecting  the  value  of  a  fraction) 
f  x  ff  =  J§-  The  second  factor  is  similarly  treated 
-|  x  |=  |~|,  and  the  gears  with  72  and  32  and  48  and  40 
teeth  are  selected,  -£-§•  =  (-|^-|-  ).  The  first  two  are  the 
driven,  and  the  last  two  the  drivers,  the  numerators  of  the 
fractions  having  represented  the  driven  gears,  and  the  72  is 
placed  as  the  worm  gear,  the  40  as  the  first  on  stud,  32  the 
second  on  stud  and  48  as  the  screw  gear.  The  two  driving 
gears  might  be  transposed  and  the  two  driven  gears  might 
also  be  transposed  without  changing  the  spiral.  That  is,  the 
72  could  be  used  as  the  second  on  stud  and  the  32  as  the 
worm  gear,  if  such  an  arrangement  was  more  convenient. 

From  what  has  been  said,  the  rules  are  plain  : 
Rules  for        Note  the  ratio  of  the  required  lead  to  ten.     This  ratio 

obtaining     _  . 

Ratio  of    is  the  compound  ratio  of  the  driven  to  the  driving  gears. 
necessary  Example:  if  the  lead  of  required  spiral  is  12  inches,  12  to 

to  Cut  a 

Given      10  will  be  the  ratio  of  the  gears. 

Spiral. 

Or,  divide  the  required  lead  by  10  and  note  the  ratio 
between  the  quotient  and  i.  This  ratio  is  usually  the  most 
simple  form  of  the  compound  ratio  of  the  driven  to  the 
driving  gears.  Example  :  if  the  required  lead  is  40  inches, 
the  quotient  40-1-10  is  4  and  the  ratio  4  to  i. 
Rule  for  Having  obtained  the  ratio  between  the  required  lead 

Determin-  .      . 

ing  Num.  and  ten  by  one  of  the  preceding  rules,  express  the  ratio  m 
Teeth  of   the  form  of  a  fraction  ;  resolve  this  fraction  into  two  fac- 


tors,  raise  these  factors  to  higher  terms  that  correspond 

Cut  a  Given  .         .  ,       ™, 

Spiral,  with  the  teeth  of  gears  that  can  be  conveniently  used.  The 
numerators  will  represent  the  driven  and  the  denomina- 
tors, the  driving  gears  that  produce  the  required  spiral. 
For  example,  what  gears  shall  be  used  to  cut  a  lead  of  27 
inches  ? 


BROWN    &    SHARPE     MFG.    CO.  215 

From  the  fact  that  the  product  of  the  driven  gears 
divided  by  the  product  of  the  drivers  equals  the  lead 
divided  by  ten,  or  one-tenth  of  the  lead,  it  is  evident  that 
ten  times  the  product  of  the  driven  gears  divided  by  the 
product  of  the  drivers  will  equal  the  lead  of  the  spiral. 
Hence  the  rule  : 

Divide  ten  times  the  product  of  the  driven  gears  by  the    Rule  for 

Ascertain- 

product  of  the  drivers  and  the  quotient  is  the  lead  of  the    ing  what 
resulting   spiral    in    inches  to   one   turn.     For    example, 
what  spiral  will  be  cut  by  gears,  with  48,  72,  32  and  40 
teeth,  the  first  two  being  used  as  driven  gears  ?     Spiral  to 
be  cut  equals  10  '  48  * 72  =27  inches  to  one  turn. 

32  x  40 

This  rule  is  often  of  service  in  determining  what  spirals 
may  be  cut  with  the  gears  the  workman  chances  to  have 
at  hand. 

The  tables  on  pages  218  to  221  give  the  leads  of  spirals 
produced  by  the  gears  furnished  with  the  machines. 

The  chapter  on  "  Continued  Fractions  "  in  our  Practi- 
cal Treatise  on  Gearing  is  of  assistance  in  selecting  gears 
for  fractional  spirals. 

•The  change  gears  having  been  selected,  the  next  step 
in  cutting  spirals  is  to  determine  the  position  at  which  the 
spiral  bed  must  be  placed  to  bring  the  spiral  in  line  with  Spirals. 
the  cutter  as  the  work  is  being  milled,  for,  if  the  spiral  is 
not  in  line  with  the  cutter  the  groove  will  not  be  cut  to  the 
shape  of  the  cutter. 

The  correct  position  of  the  spiral  bed  is  indicated  by  the 
angle  shown  at  A,  Fig.  77,  and  this  angle,  as  may  be 
noted  from  that  figure,  has  the  same  number  of  degrees 
as  the  angle  B,  which  is  termed  the  angle  of  the  spiral, 
and  is  formed  by  the  intersection  of  the  spiral  and  a  line 
parallel  with  the  axis  of  the  piece  being  milled.  The 
reason  the  angles  A  and  B  are  alike  is  that  their  cor- 
responding sides  are  perpendicular  to  each  other. 

The  angle  of  the  spiral  depends  upon  the  lead  of  the 
spiral  and  the  diameter  of  the  piece  to  be  milled.  The 
greater  the  lead  of  a  spiral  of  any  given  diameter,  the 


2l6  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.     CO. 

smaller  the  angle,  and  the  greater  the   diameter  of  any 
spiral  the  greater  the  spiral  angle. 

The  angle  may  be  ascertained  in  two  ways,  graphically, 
or  more  conveniently  by  a  simple  calculation  and  refer- 
ence to  the  accompanying  tables.  In  determining  it  graph- 
ically, a  right  angle  triangle  is  drawn  to  scale.  One  of  the 
sides  which  forms  the  right  angle  represents  the  lead  of 
the  spiral  in  inches  ;  the  other  side  represents  the  circum- 
ference of  the  piece  in  inches,  and  the  hypothenuse  repre- 
sents the  line  of  the  spiral.  The  angle  between  the  lines 
representing  the  line  of  the  spiral  and  the  lead  of  the  spi- 
ral is  the  angle  of  the  spiral.  This  angle  can  be  trans- 
ferred from  the  drawing  to  the  work  by  a  bevel  protrac- 
tor, or  even  by  cutting  a  paper  templet  and  winding  it 
about  the  work  as  shown  in  Fig.  78.  The  machine  is 
then  set  so  that  the  spiral  or  groove  as  it  touches  the  cut- 
ter will  be  in  line  with  the  cutter.  Or  the  angle  may  be 
measured  and  the  spiral  bed  set  to  a  corresponding  num- 
ber of  degrees  by  the  graduations  on  the  clamp  bed. 

The  natural  tangent  of  the  angle  of  the  spiral  is  the 
quotient  of  the  circumference  of  the  piece  divided  by  the 
lead  of  the  spiral.  Accordingly,  the  second  method 
of  obtaining  the  angle  of  the  spiral  is  to  divide  the  cir- 
cumference of  the  piece  by  the  lead,  and  note  the  num- 
ber of  degrees  opposite  the  figures  that  correspond  with 
the  quotient  in  the  accompanying  tables  of  natural  tan- 
gents, pages  222  and  223.  The  angle  having  been  thus 
obtained,  the  spiral  bed  is  set  by  the  graduations  on  the 
clamp  bed. 

Tables,  pages  218  to  221,  give  the  lead  of  spirals  pro- 
duced by  the    various  combinations  of  the   change  gears 
furnished  with  the  machine  and  the  angles  of  these  spirals 
for  diameters  from  ^  inch  to  4  inches. 
Use  of         Before  a  spiral  is  cut,  it  is  well  to  let  the  mill  iust  touch 

Machines 

in  Cutting  the  work,  then  run  the  work  along  by  hand  and  make  a 
slight  spiral  mark,  and  by  this  mark  see  whether  the 
change  gears  give  the  right  lead.  The  saddle  can  then 
be  set  to  the  proper  angle. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


217 


FIG.   77. 


FIG.  78. 


218 


BROWN  &  SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


CO 

LJ 

O 
2 


CO 

< 

oc 

CL 
CO 

CO 

oc 


o 

< 

X 

o 

Lu 
O 

- 
J 
CO 


To  FIND  THE  ANGLE  OF  SPIRAL,  DIVIDE  THE  CIRCUMFERENCE  UY  THE  PITCH  OR  LEAD,  AND  THE 
QUOTIENT  WILL  IJE  THE  TANGENT  OF  THE  ANGLE."  THEN  FIND  THE  ANGLE  IN  A  TABLE 
OF  TANGENTS.  FOR  COMPLETE  EXPLANATION  SEE  PRACTICAL 
TREATISE  ON  GEARING. 

DIAMETER  OF  THE  BLANK,  OR  SPIRAL,  TO  IJE  CUT. 

5* 

ANGLE  FOR  SETTING  THE  SADDLE. 

CO 

CO 

CO 

CO 

k 

k 

If 

V 

IN- 

rH 

S' 

rH 

- 

v^ 

"^w1 

k 

%%% 

k 

1C  00  i-l  00  W5  jj 

k 

co  o  t-  xo  cq  o  oo 

"H^  CO  CO  CO  CO  C^  Cl 

k 

"Ifsl^ffisl 

k 

f^H^fiffssss 

k 

"o'cC!  C0*<35  50  3?S*<^rH*OtOi<00400  ff 

•uinj  auo  o;  saqoni  m  TP^LJ 

5g§SS^SSSoS§S§ 

•A^aiog  no  .1139*) 

rH  rH  rH  rH  r-<          rH 

•prvjg  no  .rea*)  pnooag 

^HOOG^OXXCCXMOOOXOOOOCO 
<M<MCO'^'^(MiOCO(M^<M^C;llO 

•pms  no  jBao  isiij; 

xooooGoSSJoosoSJcoSSxoS 

miO  AA  UO  JUB9f\ 

^l^^l^l^l^l^l^^^l^q^l^^ 

BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


219 


1? 


00 


o 


(M 


CO  i-l  0 

Tt<   T^   ^ 


CO  CO  0  00  b- 

co  co 


CO  CO  CO  CO 


^HCS 


C^OOt-t^aDCOUO^^COG^rH 


0 

com 
»OCOCM 


O  C5  t~ 


•tun; 
9uo  0}  SPROUT  TIT 


00  t*-  C5  rH  G^  CO  ^O  CO 


•AV9JOg  UO  J139Q   I 


°pnis  no  a^ao  isai^ 


COXOOC^O 


OOOOOQOQOGOGOG^OOO 


220 


BROWN    &    8HARPE    MFG.     CO. 


AND  ANGLES 


< 

DC 

EL 
co 

CO 
DC 
< 

UJ 
O 

UJ 
O 
2 
< 

I 
O 

bu 

O 

u 

J 

CQ 
< 


'/I 


CO 


CO 


CO 


CO 


ar 


•tun} 
ano  03  saqoui  ui  qo^jt  d 


COCOC^CiCiXCDCOCO 
TJH  ^  ^  CO  CO  CO  CO  CO  CO 


CO  CO  CO  CO  CO  CO 


O5QOiO»OiOCO5iIO 

CO  CO  CO  CO  CO  CO  CO  CO 


-^ 

CO 


CO  CO  CO  CO  CO  CO  CO  CO 


r-fcM^  -4*  00(^4* 


COi—  Ir-  IrHOOOS 


rHOOOOOOOiaiGOQOOOt-t-t-COCOCO 


H^MHiH^HeoH-t-f^       HCJ 


H<N  w(^Ki^Hc<»HTCH^Kl-* 


ping  no  Jtjao  pnooag 


'ttUOA\.  UO  J'BSJ)   I 


00 


0  CO  ^ 


CO 

*O 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


221 


cewi 

CO 


CO 


cc 


CO 


I*. 


»0 


CO  CO  (M  IH  i-l  O  O  OO  t-  t-  CO  ^5  »0 


T—  itHi—  li—  IrHr-  IrHT-H 


col-* 


CC 


co|-* 


auo  oj  saqoni  ui  najij; 


O  CO  O 
O  Tt<  O 


t-  t- 


222 


BROWN  &  SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


NATUBAL  TANGENT. 


!>eg. 

<y 

10' 

20' 

30' 

40' 

w 

60' 

0 

.00000 

.00290 

.00581 

.00872 

.011(53 

.01454 

.01745 

89 

1 

.01745 

.02036 

.02327 

.02618 

.02909 

.03200 

.03492 

88 

2 

.03492 

.03783 

.04074 

.04366 

.04657 

.04949 

.05240 

87 

3 

.05240 

.05532 

.05824 

.06116 

.06408 

.06700 

.06992 

86 

4 

.06992 

.07285 

.07577 

.07870 

.08162 

.08455 

.08748 

85 

5 

.08748 

.09042 

.09335 

.09628 

.09922 

.10216 

.10510 

84 

6 

.10510 

.10804 

.11099 

.11393 

.11688 

.11983 

.12278 

83 

7 

.12278 

.12573 

.12869 

.13165 

.13461 

.13757 

.14054 

82 

8 

.14054 

.14350 

.14647 

.14945 

.15242 

.15540 

.15838 

81 

9 

.15838 

.16136 

.  16435 

.16734 

.17033 

.17332 

.17632 

80 

10 

.17632 

.17932 

.18233 

.18533 

.18834 

.19136 

.19438 

79 

11 

.19438 

.19740 

.20042 

.20345 

.20648 

.20951 

.21255 

78 

12 

.21255 

.21559 

.21864 

.22169 

.22474 

.22780 

.23086 

77 

13 

.23086 

.23393 

.23700 

.24007 

.24315 

.24624 

.24932 

76 

14 

.24932 

.25242 

.25551 

.25861 

.26172 

.26483 

.26794 

75 

15 

.26794 

.27106 

.27419 

.27732 

.28046 

.28360 

.28674 

74 

16 

.28674 

.28989 

.29305 

.29621 

.29938 

.30255 

.30573 

73 

17 

.30573 

.30891 

.31210 

.31529 

.31850 

.32170 

.32492 

.72 

18 

.32492 

.32813 

.33136 

.33459 

.33783 

.34107 

.34432 

71 

19 

.34432 

.34758 

.35084 

.35411 

.35739 

.36067 

.36397 

70 

20 

.36397 

.36726 

.37057 

.37388 

.37720 

.38053 

.38386 

69 

21 

.38386 

.38720 

.39055 

.39391 

.39727 

.40064 

.40402 

68 

22 

.40402 

.40741 

.41080 

.41421 

.41762 

.42104 

.42447 

67 

23 

.42447 

.42791 

.43135 

.43481 

.43827 

.44174 

.44522 

66 

24 

.44522 

.44871 

.45221 

.45572 

.45924 

.46277 

.46630 

65 

25 

.46630 

.46985 

.47341 

.47697 

.48055 

.48413 

.48773 

64 

26 

.48773 

.49133 

.49495 

.49858 

.50221 

.50586 

.50952 

63 

27 

.50952 

.51319 

.51687 

.52056 

.52427 

.52798 

.53170 

62 

28 

.53170 

.53544 

.53919 

.54295 

.54672 

.55051 

.55430 

61 

29 

.55430 

.55811 

.56193 

.50577 

.56961 

.57847 

.57735 

60 

30 

.57735 

.58123 

.58513 

.58904 

.59297 

.59690 

.60086 

59 

31 

.60086 

.60482 

.60880 

.61280 

.61680 

.62083 

.62486 

58 

32 

.62486 

.62892 

.63298 

.63707 

.64116 

.64528 

.64940 

57 

33 

.64940 

.65355 

.65771 

.66188 

.66607 

.67028 

.67450 

56 

34 

.67450 

.67874 

.68300 

.68728 

.69157 

.69588 

.70020 

55 

35 

.70020 

.70455 

.70891 

.71329 

.71769 

.72210 

.72654 

54 

36 

.72654 

.73099 

.73546 

.73996 

.74447 

.74900 

.75355 

53 

37 

.75355 

.75812 

.76271 

.76732 

.77195 

.77661 

.78128 

52 

38 

.78128 

.78598 

.79069 

.79543 

.80019 

.80497 

.80978 

51 

39 

.80978 

.81461 

.81946 

.82433 

.82923 

.83415 

.83910 

50 

40 

=83910 

.84406 

.84906 

.85408 

.85912 

.86419 

.86928 

49 

41 

.86928 

.87440 

.87955 

.88472 

.88992 

.89515 

.90040 

48 

42 

.90040 

.90568 

.91099 

.91633 

.92169 

.92709 

.93251 

47 

43 

.93251 

.93796 

.94345 

.94896 

.95450 

.96008 

.96568 

46 

44 

.96568 

.97132 

.97699 

.98269 

.98843 

.99419 

1.0000 

45 

60' 

50' 

40' 

30 

20' 

10' 

0' 

Deg. 

NATURAL  COTANGENT. 


BROWN  &  SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 


223 


NATURAL  TANGENT. 


Deg. 

0' 

10' 

20' 

30' 

40' 

50' 

60 

45 

1.0000 

1.0058 

1.0117 

1.0176 

1.0235 

1.0295 

1.0355 

44 

46 

1.0355 

1.0415 

•1.0476 

1.0537 

1.0599 

1.0661 

1.0723 

43 

47 

1.0723 

1.0786 

1.0849 

1.0913 

1.0977 

1.1041 

1.1106 

43 

48 

1.1106 

1.1171 

1  .  1236 

1.1302 

1.1369 

1.1436 

1.1503 

41 

49 

1.1503 

1.1571 

1.1639 

1.1708 

1.1777 

1.1847 

1.1917 

40 

50 

1.1917 

1.1988 

1.2059 

1.2131 

1.2203 

1.2275 

1.2349 

39 

51 

1.2349 

1.2422 

1.2496 

1.2571 

1.2647 

1.2723 

1.2799 

38 

52 

1.2799 

1.2876 

1.2954 

1.3032 

1.3111 

1.3190 

1.3270 

37 

53 

.3270 

1.3351 

1.3432 

1.3514 

1.3596 

1.3680 

1.3763 

36 

54 

.3763 

1.3848 

1.3933 

1.4019 

1.4106 

1.4193 

1.4281 

35 

55 

.4281 

1.4370 

1.4459 

1.4550 

1.4641 

1.4733 

1.4825 

34 

56 

.4825 

1.4919 

1.5013 

1.5108 

1.5204 

1.5301 

1.5398 

33 

57 

.5398 

1.5497 

1.5596 

1.5696 

1.5798 

1.5900 

1.6003 

32 

58 

1.6003 

1.6107 

1.6212 

1.6318 

1.6425 

1.6533 

1.6642 

31 

59 

1.6642 

1.6753 

1.6864 

1.6976 

1.7090 

1.7204 

1.7320 

30 

60 

1.7320 

1.7437 

1.7555 

1.7674 

1.7795 

1.7917 

1.8040 

29 

61 

1.8040 

1.8164 

1.8290 

1.8417 

1.8546 

1.8676 

1.8807 

28 

62 

1.8807 

1.8940 

1.9074 

1.9209 

1.9347 

1.9485 

1.9626 

27 

63 

1.9626 

1.9768 

1.9911 

2.0056 

2.0203 

2.0352 

2.0503 

26 

64 

3.0503 

2.0655 

2.0809 

2.0965 

2.1123 

2.1283 

2.1445 

25 

65 

2.1445 

2.1609 

2.1774 

2.1943 

2.2113 

2.2285 

2.2460 

24 

66 

2.2460 

2.2637 

2.2816 

2.2998 

2.3182 

2.3369 

2.3558 

23 

67 

2.3558 

2.3750 

2.3944 

2.4142 

2.4342 

2.4545 

2.4750 

22 

68 

2.4750 

2.4959 

2.5171 

2.5386 

2.5604 

2.5826 

2.6050 

21 

69 

2.6050 

2.6279 

2.6510 

2.6746 

2.6985 

2.7228 

2.7474 

20 

70 

2.7474 

2.7725 

2.7980 

2.8239 

2.8502 

2.8770 

2.9042 

19 

71 

2.9042 

2.9318 

2.9600 

2.9886 

3.0178 

3.0474 

3.0776 

18 

72 

3.0776 

3.1084 

3.1397 

3.1715 

3.2040 

3.2371 

3.2708 

17 

73 

3.2708 

3.3052 

3.3402 

3.3759 

3.4123 

3.4495 

3.4874 

16 

74 

3.4874 

3.5260 

3.5655 

3.6058 

3.6470 

3.6890 

3.7320 

15 

75 

3.7320 

3.7759 

3.8208 

3.8667 

3.9136 

3.9616 

4.0107 

14 

76 

4.0107 

4.0610 

4.1125 

4.1653 

4.2193 

4.2747 

4.3314 

13 

77 

4.3314 

4.3896 

4.4494 

4.5107 

4.5736 

4.6382 

4.7046 

12 

*8 

4.7046 

4.7728 

4.8430 

4.9151 

4.9894 

5.0658 

5.1445 

11 

79 

5.1445 

5.2256 

5.3092 

5.3955 

5.4845 

5.5763 

5.6712 

10 

80 

5.6712 

5.7693 

5.8708 

5.9757 

6.0844 

6.1970 

6.3137 

9 

81 

6.3137 

6.4348 

6.5605 

6.6911 

6.8269 

6.9682 

7.1153 

8 

82 

7.1153 

7.2687 

7.4287 

7.5957 

7.7703 

7.9530 

8.1443 

7 

83 

8.1443 

8.3449 

8.5555 

8.7768 

9.0098 

9.2553 

9.5143 

6 

84 

9.5143 

9.7881 

10.078 

10.385 

10.711 

11.059 

11.430 

5 

85 

11.430 

11.826 

12.250 

12.706 

13.196 

13.726 

14.300 

4 

86 

14.300 

14.924 

15.604 

16.349 

17.169 

18.075 

19.081 

3 

87 

19.081 

20.205 

21.470 

22.904 

24.541 

26.431 

28.636 

2 

88 

28.636 

31.241 

34.367 

38.188 

42.964 

49.103 

57.290 

1 

89 

57.390 

68.750 

85.939 

114.58 

171.88 

343.77 

00 

0 

60' 

50 

40' 

30' 

20' 

10' 

0' 

Deg. 

NATURAL  COTANGENT. 


224 


Worms, 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

Special  care  should  be  taken  in  cutting  spirals  that  the 
work  does  not  slip,  and  when  a  cut  is  made,  it  is  well  to 
drop  the  work  away  from  the  mill  while  coming  back  for 
another  cut,  or  the  mill  may  be  stopped  and  turned  to 
such  a  position  that  the  teeth  will  not  touch  the  work 
while  the  spiral  bed  is  brought  back  preparatory  to 
another  cut. 

Among  the  spirals  most  commonly  cut  on  Milling 
Machines  are  worms,  spiral  gears,  spiral  mills,  counter- 
bores  and  twist  drills. 

In  making  such  cuts  as  are  alike  on  both  sides,  for 
instance,  the  threads  of  worms  or  the  teeth  of  spiral 


Milling 
Cutters,  etc. 


Setting  for  Spiral   Mill  Cutting. 

gears,  care  must  be  taken  to  set  the  work  centrally  per- 
pendicular with  the  centre  line  of  the  cutter  before  swing- 
ing the  spiral  bed  to  the  angle  of  the  spiral. 

Cuts  that  have  one  face  radial  are  best  made  with  an 
angular  cutter,  as  shown  on  page  127,  for  cutters  of  this 
form  readily  clear  the  radial  face  of  the  cut,  and  so  keep 
sharp  longer  and  produce  a  smoother  surface  than  when 
the  radial  face  is  cut  in  a  vertical  plane  with  a  side  milling 
cutter,  as  shown  on  page  126,  where  the  teeth  can  have 
no  side  clearance  from  the  work.  The  setting  for  these 
cuts  must  also  be  made  before  swinging  the  spiral  bed 
to  the  angle  of  the  spiral. 

By  setting  the  cutter,  as  shown  in  above  cut,  so  that  the 
distance  a  is  one-tenth  the  diameter  B,  the  face  cut  by  the 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


225 


1 2  degree  side  of  the  cutter  will  be  nearly  radial  for  teeth 
of  milling  cutters  of  the  usual  proportions. 

The  operation  of  forming  a  twist  drill  is  shown  in  Fig. 
77.  The  drill  is  held  in  a  collet  or  chuck,  and,  if  very 
long,  is  allowed  to  pass  through  the  spindle  of  the  spiral 
head.  The  cutter  is  placed  on  the  arbor  so  that  it  will 
directly  over  the  centre  of  the  drill,  and  the  bed  is  set  at 
the  angle  of  spiral,  as  given  in  the  following  table  : 

TABLE    OF    CUTTERS,    PITCHES,    GEARS    AND    ANGLES    FOR 
TWIST   DRILLS. 


1 

<H 

Q 

VH 
O 

o 

rt 

tH 

d  • 

o  a 

rt  • 

o  ^ 

0  fc-' 

O  _; 

O  S 
*% 

Jl 

il 

c 

i-t  SH 

rt  O 

si 

M^ 

•gS 

o  a 

ll 

f! 

03 

.S^ 

PH  hH 

O  »•*" 

!_, 

8  ° 

O 

^m 

s 

H 

S 

02 

TV 

.06 

.67 

24 

86 

24 

100 

16°  20' 

1 

r 

.08 

1.12 

24 

86 

40 

100 

19°  20' 

t 

.11 
.15 

1.67 
1.94 

24 
32 

64 
64 

32 

28 

72 

72 

19°  25' 
21° 

•] 

% 

.19 

2.92 

24 

64 

56 

72 

20° 

i 

.23 

3.24 

40 

48 

28 

72 

21° 

f 

.27 
.31 

3.89 
4.17 

56 
40 

48 

72 

24 

48 

72 
64 

20°  10' 
20°  30' 

T 

% 

u 

.35 

4.86 

40 

64 

56 

72 

20° 

j 

.39 

5.33 

48 

40 

32 

72 

20°  12' 

- 

i 

.44 

6.12 

56 

40 

28 

64 

19°  30' 

| 

.50 

6.48 

56 

48 

40 

72 

20° 

- 

i 

.56 

7.29 

56 

48 

40 

64 

19°  20' 

.62 

7.62 

64 

48 

32 

56 

19°  50' 

\   • 

-i 

.70 

8.33 

48 

32 

40 

72 

19°  30' 

I1 

.77 

8.95 

86 

48 

28 

56 

19°  20' 

H 

.85 

9.33 

56 

40 

48 

72 

20  40' 

The  depth  of  groove  in  a  twist  drill  diminishes  as  it 
approaches  the  shank,  in  order  to  obtain  increased  strength 
at  the  place  where  the  drill  is  otherwise  generally  broken. 
The  variation  in  depth  is  conditional ;  depending  mainly 
on  the  strength  it  is  desirable  to  obtain,  or  the  usage  the 
drill  is  subject  to,  as  in  different  classes  of  work.  To 


Twist 
Drills. 


226  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    GO. 

secure  variation  in  the  depth  of  the  groove,  the  spiral  head 
spindle  is  elevated  slightly  ;  depending,  in  this  case  on  the 
length  of  flute,  for  which,  when  2  inches  or  less  in  length, 
the  angle  may  be  ^  degree ;  2  to  5  inches,  ^  degree ;  5 
inches  and  over,  i  degree.  This  is  generally  satisfactory 
in  this  respect  in  our  own  work,  as  the  drills  are  seldom 
very  long. 

When  large  drills  are  held  by  the  centres,  the  head 
should  be  depressed  in  order  to  diminish  the  depth  of 
groove. 

The  outer  end  of  the  drill  is  supported  by  the  centre 
rest,  as  shown  in  Fig.  79,  and  when  quite  small  should  be 
pressed  down  firmly,  as  illustrated,  until  the  cutter  has 
passed  over  the  end. 

The  elevating  screw  of  this  rest  is  hollow,  and  contains 
a  small  centre  piece  with  a  V  groove  cut  therein  to  aid  in 
holding  the  work  central.  This  piece  may  be  made  other- 
wise, to  adapt  it  to  special  work. 

Another,  and  very  important  operation  on  the  twist 
drill,  is  that  of  "  backing  off  "  the  rear  of  the  lip,  so  as  to 
give  it  the  necessary  clearance,  to  prevent  excessive  fric- 
tional  resistance.  In  the  illustration,  Fig.  80,  the  bed  is 
turned  about  y2  degree  as  for  cutting  a  right  hand  spiral, 
but  as  the  angle  depends  on  several  conditions,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  determine  what  the  effect  will  be  under  differ- 
ent circumstances.  A  slight  study  of  the  figure  will  be 
sufficient  for  this,  by  assuming  the  effect  of  different 
angles,  mills  and  the  pitches  of  spirals.  The  object  of 
placing  the  bed  at  an  angle  is  to  cause  the  mill  E  to  cut 
into  the  lip  at  /  and  have  it  just  touch  the  surface  at  /. 
The  line  r  being  parallel  with  the  face  of  the  mill,  the 
angular  deviation  of  the  bed  is  clearly  shown  at  a,  in  com- 
parison with  the  side  or  the  drill. 

From  a  little  consideration  it  will  be  seen  that  while  the 
drill  has  a  positive  traversing  and  rotative  movement,  the 
edge  of  the  mill  at  /  must  always  touch  the  lip  a  given  dis- 
tance from  the  front  edge  ;  this  being  the  vanishing 
point,  if  such  we  may  call  it.  The  other  surface  forming 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  22fj 

the  real  diameter  of  the  drill  is  beyond  reach  of  the  cutter, 
and  is  so  left  to  guide  and  steady  it  while  in  use.  The 
point  e,  shown  in  the  enlarged  section,  Fig.  80,  shows 
where  the  cutting  commences,  and  its  increase  until  it 
reaches  a  maximum  depth  at  c,  where  it  may  be  increased 
or  diminished,  according  to  tfre  angle  employed  in  the 
operation,  the  line  of  cutter  action  being  represented  by  i  i. 
Before  backing  off,  the  surface  of  the  smaller  drills  in 
particular,  should  be  oxidized  by  heating  until  it  assumes 
some  distinct  color.  The  object  of  this  is  to  clearly  show 
the  action  of  the  mill  on  the  lip  of  the  drill,  for,  when 
satisfactory,  a  uniform  streak  of  oxidized  surface,  from 
the  front  edge  of  the  lip  back,  is  left  untouched  by  the 
mill  as  represented  in  the  cut  at  e. 

We  find  it  a  great  advantage  to  grind  drills  after  they 
are  hardened,  as  they  can  then  be  made  to  run  true  with  the 
shank.  If  tapered  back  about  .003"  in  6"  it  will  be 
found  that  this  clearance  will  cause  them  to  run  better. 
To  grind  the  drill  it  is  necessary  to  make  it  with  a  60° 
point,  as  shown  in  Fig.  80,  so  that  it  will  run  in  a  counter- 
sunk centre.  After  grinding,  this  point  can  be  ground  off 
when  the  drill  is  sharpened. 

It  is  sometimes  preferred  to  use  left  handed  cutters  so 
that  cut  will  begin  at  the  shank  end.  By  starting  the  cut 
in  at  this  end  the  tendency  to  lift  the  drill  blank  from  the 
rest  is  lessened. 

When  giving  directions  for  cutting  spirals  in  any  of  L 
the  foregoing  pages,  right  hand  spirals  are  at  all  times  Spirals 
referred  to.  For  the  production  of  left  hand  spirals, 
the  only  changes  necessary  are  the  swinging  of  the  spiral 
bed  to  the  opposite  side  of  the  centre  line,  the  introduc- 
tion of  an  intermediate  gear  upon  the  stud,  Fig.  5,  to 
engage  with  either  pair  of  change  gears  for  changing  the 
direction  of  rotation  of  the  spiral  head  spindle. 


228 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


FIG.   79. 


FIG.  8O. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


229 


Cutters  for  Making  Straight  Lipped  Twist 
Drills. 


•M 
*H     M 

s 

*o 

s 

.S  ^ 
11 

1 

1-16" 

1  3-4" 

7-8" 

2 

1-8 

" 

u 

3 

3-16 

t  & 

u 

4 

1-4 

<* 

u 

5 

5-16 

2 

;  t 

6 

3-8 

*i 

*'« 

7 

7-16 

u 

u 

8 

1-2 

" 

u 

9 

9-16 

2  1-8 

(( 

10 

5-8 

*« 

u 

11 

11-16 

u 

u 

12 

3-4 

2  1-4 

4t 

13 

13-16 

i« 

t  t 

14 

7-8 

2  1-2 

K 

15 

15-16 

4  4 

(t 

16 

1 

2  3-4 

(( 

17 

1    1-8 

** 

(  t 

18 

1    1-4 

3 

i  ( 

19 

1    1-2 

3  1-2 

1 

20 

1    3-4 

" 

4  4 

21 

2                         3  3-4 

4  4 

230 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


List  of  Cutters  for  Making  Twist  Drills. 


Number  of 
Cutter. 

Diameter  of 
Drill. 

Diameter  of 
circle  made  by 
Cutter. 

Hole  in  Cutter. 

Diameter  of 
Cutter. 

1 

1-16   in. 

.06      in. 

7-8   in. 

1  3-4  in. 

2 

1-8      •• 

.08      " 

u 

u 

3 

3-16    " 

.11       " 

u 

u 

4 

1-4      " 

.15      " 

" 

u 

5 

5-16    " 

.19      " 

It 

2  in. 

6 

3-8      " 

.23      " 

t  ( 

u 

7 

7-16    " 

.27      " 

u 

t  c 

8 

1-2      " 

.31      '* 

u 

1  1 

9 

9-16    " 

.35      " 

I  ; 

2  1-8  in. 

10 

5-8      " 

.39      " 

i.  ; 

u 

11 

11-16    " 

.44      " 

i  C 

*« 

12 

3-4      " 

.50  x   " 

u 

2  1-4  in. 

13 

13-16    " 

.56      " 

u 

u 

14 

7-8      " 

.62      " 

(  i 

2  1-2  in. 

15 

15-16    " 

.70      " 

u 

(  4 

16 

1          " 

.77      " 

u 

2  3-4  in. 

17 

1  1-8  " 

.85      " 

*« 

" 

By  the  use  of  our  special  cutters  as  per  list  annexed, 
Straight  Lipped  Twist  Drills  can  be  made  by  following  the 
same  general  instructions  as  those  just  given. 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

When  spirals  cannot  be  conveniently  cut  with  side  or 
angular  milling  cutters,  as  previously  described,  it  is  some- 
times convenient  to  use  end  mills,  as  for  example,  when 
the  diameter  of  the  piece  is  very  large,  or  the  spiral  is  of 
such  a  lead  that  the  spiral  bed  cannot  be  set  at  the 
requisite  angle,  the  work  is  so  held  that  its  centre  and 
that  of  the  mill  will  be  in  the  same  plane  and  the  bed  is 
parallel  with  the  ways  of  the  machine.  Fig.  8 1  is  a  sug- 
gestive specimen  of  work  done  in  this  way. 


231 


FIG.   81. 


INDEX. 


PAGE. 

Adjusting  Milling  Machine  Spindles  I7 

Adjusting  Milling  Machine  Spindles,  General  Description          .         .117 

Adjusting  Centre  of  Foot-Stock,  Gauge  for 24 

Angles,  Change  Gears  and  Spirals,  Tables  of  .  .  218,219,220,221 
Angles,  Cutters,  Pitches  and  Gears  for  Twist  Drills,  Table  of  .  .225 
Angle  of  Elevation  of  Index  Spindle  .......  178 

Angular  Cutters,  Sharpening  of ^7 

Arbors,  Washers  and  Collars  for 148 

ATTACHMENTS  : 

Circular  Milling.     For  Use  on  No.  2  Vertical  Spindle  Milling 

Machine  ..........       97 

Gear   Cutting.      Used   on    No.    i    Universal  Milling    Machine 

Design  prior  to  1893         ........       98 

Hand  Milling.     Used  on  No.  o  Plain  Milling  Machine          .         .     106 

High  Speed   and  Driving  Fixture.     Used  on  Nos.  i  and  2  Uni- 
versal Milling  Machines  and  i  and  2  Plain  Milling  Machines     103 

Taper    Milling.      Used    on   Nos.    i    and    2    Universal    Milling 

Machines          ..........     107 

Vertical  Spindle  Milling.     Used  on  Nos.  i,  2,  3  and  4  Univer- 
sal Milling  Machines  and  i,  2  and  3  Plain  Milling  Machines       99 

Vertical   Spindle  Milling.      Used  on   Nos.  4  and  5  and  No.  4 

Design,  1893,  Universal  Milling  Machines     .         .         .         .102 

Vertical     Spindle    Milling.      Used    on    No.    24    Plain  Milling 

Machine  ..........     103 

Average  Speed  of  Mills  or  Cutters       ........     142 

Bevel  Gears.  Cutting  on  Universal  Milling  Machine.  O.  J.  Beale  200 
Backing  off  Twist  Drills 226 

CARE  AND  USE  OF  MILLING  MACHINES  : 

Adjusting  Spindle  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         -117 

Diameter  of  Main  Line  Pulley 115 

Oiling 115 

Oil  Pans  ...........  117 

Placing  Machines  and  Counter-shafts  .....  115 

Castings  and  Forgings,  Pickling          .......  148 

Centres,  Index,  10" no 


234  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

PAGE. 

Centres,  Index,  8  '  and  6%"  Single  Dial     ......  109 

Change  Gears,  Rules  for  Obtaining  Ratio  of 214 

Change  Gears,  Selection  of,  for  Cutting  Spirals          ....  212 

Change  Gears,  Rules  for  ascertaining  Spiral  Cut  by  any  given  Gear  215 

Change  Gears,  Spirals,  and  Angles,  Tables  of        .         218,  219,  220,  221 

Circular  Milling  Attachment         ........  97 

Clearance  of  Mills 134 

Close  Limit  Slot  Cutting 160 

Collars  and  Washers  for  Arbors  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .  148 

Cored  T  Slots  in  Cast  Iron,  Milling 160 

Cotangents  and  Tangents,  Natural,  Tables  of    .         .         .         .     222,  223 

Cotter  Mills 134 

Counter-shafts,  Placing,  Speed  of         .         .         .         .         .         .         -115 

Cutting  Angle  of  Teeth  of  Mills 133 

Cutting  Bevel  Gears  in  a  Universal  Milling  Machine.     O.  J.  Beale  .  200 
Cutting  Gears        .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .184 

Cutting  off  Stock  ...........  149 

Cutting  Left  Hand  Spirals    .........  227 

Cutting  Slots          ...........  154 

Cutting  Spirals,  Cutters  Used  for         .......  224 

Cutting  Spirals,  Setting  Cutter  for 224 

Cutting  Spirals  with  End  Mills 231 

Cutting  Twist  Drills 225 

Cutting  Worms      ...........  224 

COMPOUND  INDEXING  : 

Adjustable  Back  Pin      .         .          .         ...         ...         .         .  198 

Approximate  Indexing 190 

Explanation  of  Tables             ........  190 

Extra  Divisions  by  Use  of  Adjustable  Back  Pin            .         .         .  198 

Manner  of  Using  Machines             189 

Method  of  Combining  the  Two  Index  Settings    ....  188 

Proof  of  Correctness  of  Moves      .......  189 

Use  of  Compound  Movements.     (Schneider's  Method.)      .         .  197 
Table  of  Compound  Index  Movements  for  Nos.  i,  2,  3,  and  4, 
Design    1893,   Universal   Milling   Machines.      (Schneider's 

Method.)           ..........  197 

Tables  of  Compound  Index  Movements        .        191,  192,  193,  194,  195 

CUTTERS  : 

6"  and  Above,  Speed  of.     Addy.     Briggs.              ....  143 

Direction  of  Work  Moved  Under 141 

Dividing  with  Index  Head     ........  182 

For  Making  Straight  Lipped  Twist  Drills 229 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  235 


For  Making  Twist  Drills,  List  of 230 

Milling,  etc.,  Used  in  Cutting  Spirals  .         .         .         .         .         .  224 

Pitches,  Gears  and  Angles  for  Cutting  Twist  Drills,  Table  of     .  225 

Rule  for  Finding  Pitch  of  Teeth  of.     Addy.         .         .         ,         .  133 

Speed  of          ...........  142 

T  Slot 158 

Used  for  Cutting  Spirals        ........  224 

CUTTERS  OR  MILLS  USED  ON  MILLING  MACHINES  : 

Clearance  of  Mills           .........  134 

Cutting  Angle  of  Teeth  of  Mills 133 

Diameter  of  Hole  in  Cutters  .         .         .         .         .         .         -131 

Diameter  of  Mills             ....,..,.  129 

English  Cutters      ..........  133 

Fly  Cutter,  Formed  Mills  or  Cutters 124 

Gang  Cutters 124 

Grade  of  Emery  Wheel  for  Sharpening         .  136 

Length  of  Mills      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .  131 

Number  of  Teeth  of         .         .         .         -         .         .         .         .         -131 

Outline  Cuts  Showing  Form  of  Cuts              129 

Sharpening  Angular  and  Formed  Cutters     .         .         .         .         .  137 

Sharpening  Mills             .........  136 

Sketches 134 

Templets          ...........  136 

Use  of  Emery  Wheel,  Width  of  Face     ......  136 

Decimal  Equivalents,  Table  of      ........  158 

Depth  of  Groove  Cut  in  Tap         .         . 182 

Diameter  of  Hole  in  Mills 131 

Diameter  of  Main  Line  Pulley      .         .         .         .         .         .         .  115 

Diameter  of  Mills  or  Cutters         ........  129 

Dimensions  of  Universal  Milling  Machines         .....  4 

Direction  of  Work  Moved  Undei  a  Mill       ......  141 

Direct  Indexing.     (See  Indexing.)        .......  176 

Dividing  Cutters,  etc.,  with  Index  Head 182 

Dovetailed  Key-Way  Cutting 158 

Drills,  Twist,  Backing  Off  of 226 

Drills,  Grinding  after  Hardening 227 

Driving  Fixture  and  High  Speed  Attachment 103 

Emery  Wheel  for  Sharpening  Mills  or  Cutters,     Grade  of,  Use  of, 

Width  of  Face 136 

End  Mill  with  Centre  Cut 154 

End  Mills,  Cutting  Spirals  with  ....                                    .  231 

Ends  of  Small  Pieces,  Squaring 149 

English  Cutters  or  Mills 133 

Examples  of  Work  Done  on  Milling  Machines  ....  149 


236  BROWN  &  SHARPE  MFG.  CO. 

EXAMPLES  OF  OPERATIONS  ON  MILLING  MACHINES  : 

PAGE. 

Average  Speed  of  Mills  .         .  .         .         .        .        .142 

Cutting  off  Stock i49 

Cutting  Slots           ..........  154 

Direction  of  Work  Moved  Under  Mills  or  Cutters         .         .         .141 

End  Mill  with  Centre  Cut 154 

Examples  of  Work  done  on  Milling  Machines      ....  149 

Experiments  Testing  Method  of  Moving  Work  Under  Cutter     .  141 
Fixtures  for  Small  Work        .         ,         .         .         .         .         .         .152 

Limits  in  Milling             .........  144 

Lubricant  for  Use  with  Pump         .......  140 

Pickling  Castings  and  Forgings    .         .         .         .         .         .         .  148 

Selection  of  Work,  Setting  Vise  with  Plain  Base          .          .         .  148 

Squaring  Ends  of  Small  Pieces      .......  149 

Speed  for  Cutters  6"  Diameter  and  Above.     Addy.     Briggs        .  143 

Speed  of  Mills  or  Cutters 142 

T  Slot  Cutter 158 

Tables  of  Speeds  and  Feeds   ......      145,  146,  147 

Use  of  Oil  on  Cutters  or  Work      .......  140 

Use  of  Two  or  More  Mills  at  One  Time 150 

Washers  and  Collars  for  Arbors             .         .         .         .         ...  148 

Experiments  to  Test  Method  of  Running  Cutter         .         .         .         .  141 

Face,  Width  of,  Emery  Wheels 136 

Fixtures  for  Small  Work      .........  152 

Fixture  for  Milling  Key-Ways      ........  174 

Fluting  Taps  and  Reamers   .........  182 

Fly  Cutters 124 

Foot-stock,  Gauge  for  Adjusting           .......  24 

Foot-stock,  Indexing,  Construction  Nos.  2,  3,  4,  Universal  Milling 

Machine  Design,  1893              ........  22 

Forgings  and  Castings,  Pickling 148 

Formed  Cutters  or  Mills        .........  124 

Formed  Cutters  or  Mills,  Sharpening           ......  137 

Gang  Cutters 124,  152 

Gauge  for  Adjusting  Foot-stock  Centres 24 

Gears,  Angles,  Pitches  and  Cutters,  for  Twist  Drills,  Table  of          .  225 

Gears,  Bevel,  Cutting  in  a  Universal  Milling  Machine.     O.  J.  Beale  200 

Gears,  Cutting       .         .         . 184 

Gear  Cutting  Attachment 98 

Grade  of  Emery  Wheel  for  Sharpening  Mills      .....  136 

Grinding  Twist  Drills  after  Hardening 227 

Grooves  in  Taps,  Depth  of 182 

Hand  Milling  Attachment,  for  No.  o  Plain  Milling  Machine     .         .  106 

Head,  Index,  and  Centres,  with  Centre  Rest 108 

High  Speed  Milling  Attachment  and  Driving  Fixture        .         .         -103 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  237 

PAGE. 

Robbing  Worm  Wheels 186 

Hobs  with  Relieved  Teeth 186 

Hole  in  Mills  or  Cutters,  Diameter  of         ......  131 

Indexing,  Compound.     (See  Compound  Indexing.)  ....  188 

Indexing,  Direct    .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .176 

Index  Plate 176 

Index  Plate  Sector 178 

Index  Tables  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .179,   180 

Index  Centres,  8"  and  6%"  Single  Dial 109 

Index  Centres,  10" no 

Index  Head  and  Centres,  with  Centre  Rest 108 

Indexing  Head  Stock  or  Spiral  Head.    Used  on  Nos.  i  and  4,  No.  3 

Prior   to  1893.     Universal  Milling  Machines. 

Change  Gears,  Chuck             ........  10 

Construction  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .     7,   10,  1 1,   12 

Crank  Pin        ...........  10 

Cutting  Spirals       ......  10 

Cutting  Spirals  not  given  in  Tables 13 

Elevation  of  Head           .........  10 

Sector              ...........  10 

Indexing  Head  Stock  or  Spiral    Head.     Used  on  Nos.  2,  3  and  4, 

Universal  Milling  Machines,  Design  of  1893. 
Construction  .........         20,  22 

Foot-stock  Construction         ........  22 

Gauge  for  Adjusting  Centre 24 

To  Throw  Worm  Out  of  Gear 22 

Kev-ways,  Fixture  for  Milling      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .  174 

Key-way,  Milling  Dovetailed 158 

Lathe  Carriage,  Milling  of  .........  160 

Left  Hand  Spirals,  Cutting  .........  227 

Length  of  Mills  or  Cutters    ....                  ....  131 

Limits  in  Milling           .         .         .               f .         .         .         .         .         .  144 

Lubricant  to  Use  with  Pump         ........  140 

Machines,  Placing 115 

Main  Line  Pulley,  Diameter  of 115 

Material,  Workmanship  and  Design    .         .         .         .         .         .  113 

MILLING  MACHINES,  CARE  AND  USE  OF  : 

Adjusting  Spindle 117 

Counter-shafts,  Diameter  of  Main  Line  Pulley,  Oiling        .         .  115 

Oil  Pans         ...........  117 

Placing  Machines 115 

Speed  of  counter-shafts           .         .         . 115 

Milling  Machines  and  Skill  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .119 

Milling  Machines,  Plain,  General  Description    .         .         .         .         .  45 


238  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

MILLING  : 

PAGE. 

Cored  T  Slots  in  Cast  Iron 160 

Faces  of  Worm  Wheels 186 

Lathe  Carriage 160 

Limits  in 144 

Rack  Teeth,  with  Formed  Cutter 160 

Round  Ends  of  Pieces             ........  167 

Worm  Wheels,  Hobbing 186 

Milling  Machines,  Use  of  in  Cutting  Spirals       .....  216 
Milling  Operations  in  the  Manufacture  of  the  No.  i  Universal  Mil- 
ling Machine  Spiral  Head  and  Foot-stock             ....  168 
Milling  Operations  in  the  Manufacture  of  the  No.  2  Universal  Mil- 
ling Machine          ..........  170 

MILLS  : 

Clearance  of    .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .  134 

Cotter      ............  134 

Cutting  Angle  of  Teeth  of 133 

Diameter  of   ...........  129 

Diameter  of  Hole  in                .         .         .         .         .         .         .  "      .  131 

End,  with  Centre  Cut     .........  154 

Formed  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .124 

Length  of                .         .         .         .         .         .         ,         .         .         .  131 

Sharpening  of 136 

Simultaneous  Use  of  Two  or  More 150 

Sketches  of     ...........  134 

Speed  of 142 

Straddle,  Use  of 152 

Tempering  of          ..........  131 

Templets 136 

Natural  Tangents  and  Cotangents,  Tables  of      .         .         .         .     222,  223 

Number  of  Teeth  of  Mills            ».         .         .         .         .         .         .         .  131 

Number  of  Teeth  of  Gears  to  Cut  Spirals,  Rules  for  .         .         .214 

Oil  on  the  Cutters  or  Work,  Use  of 140 

Oiling  Machines   .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .  115 

Oil  Pans         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         ,         .  117 

Oil  Pump,  Method  of  Attaching 68 

Oil  Pump,  Lubricant  to  Use  With 140 

Operations,  Milling,  in  the  Manufacture  of  the  No.  I  Universal  Mil- 
ling Machine  Spiral  Head  and  Foot-stock           ....  168 
Operations,  Milling,  in  the  Manufacture  of  the  No.  2  Universal  Mil- 
ling Machine           ..........  170 

Operations,  Special 160 

Outline  Cuts,  Showing  Form  Cut  by  different  Cutters       .         .         .  129 

Pans,  Oil .117 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  239 

PAGE. 

Pickling  Castings  and  Forgings I48 

Pitch  of  Teeth  of  Cutters  or  Mills 133 

Pitches,  Cutters,  Gears  and  Angles  for  Twist  Drills,  Table  of           .  225 

Placing  Machines  and  Counter-shafts 115 

Placing  Tools        . .         .  uy 

PLAIN  MILLING  MACHINES: 

Dimension  Tables  .         .         ...         .         .         .         .         46,  47 

General  Description       .........  45 

No.  o  Plain  Milling  Machine,  Rack  or  Screw  Feed. 

Accessories,  Adjustable  Dials,  Automatic  Feed  of  Table      .         .  51 

Capacity 48 

Cone .49 

Counter-shaft         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         -51 

Feed  Table 50 

Frame 51 

Hand  Milling  Attachment     ........  106 

Overhanging  Arm,  Spindle            .......  49 

Table,  Vises 51 

No.  i  Plain  Milling  Machine,  Rack  or  Screw  Feed. 

Accessories,  Adjustable  Dials,  Automatic  Feed  of  Table      .         .  56 

Capacity 52 

Cone 53 

Counter-shaft 56 

Feed  Tables  . 54i  55 

Frame              ...........  56 

High  Speed  Milling  Attachment  and  Driving  Fixture          .         .  103 

Overhanging  Arm,  Spindle,  Table        ......  53 

Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Attachment             .....  99 

Vises 56 

No.  2  Plain  Milling  Machine,  Rack  or  Screw  Feed. 

Accessories,  Adjustable  Dials         .......  62 

Automatic  Feed  of  Table        .         .......  59 

Capacity 58 

Cone 59 

Countershaft 62 

Feed  Tables  60,  6 1 

Frame      ............  62 

High  Speed  Milling  Attachment  and  Driving  Fixture          .         .  103 

Overhanging  Arm,  Spindle,  Table         ......  59 

Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Attachment     ......  99 

Vises        ............  62 

No.  3  Plain  Milling  Machine. 

Accessories,  Adjustable  Dials 6$ 

Automatic  Feed  of  Table 65 


240  BROWN    A    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

PAGE. 

Capacity 64 

Cone 65 

Counter-shaft 68 

Feed  Table 66 

Frame 68 

Oil  Pump 68 

Overhanging  Arm 65 

Speed  and  Feed  Tables           145 

Spindle,  Table 65 

Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Attachment    .         .  .         .         -99 

Vise 68 

No.  4  Plain  Milling  Machine,  No.  6  Prior  to  1893. 

Accessories,  Adjustable  Dials         .......  74 

Automatic  Feed  of  Table 71 

Capacity          ...........  70 

Cone        ............  71 

Counter-shaft 74 

Feed  Table 73 

Frame,  Knee,  Oil  Pump          ........  74 

Overhanging  Arm           .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .  71 

Speed  and  Feed  Table             146 

Spindle,  Table 71 

Vertical  Spindle,  Milling  Attachment 102 

Vise 74 

No.  5  Plain  Milling  Machine,  No.  8  Prior  to  1893. 

Accessories,  Adjustable  Dials         .......  78 

Automatic  Feed  of  Table 77 

Capacity          ...........  76 

Cone 77 

Counter-shaft,  Frame 78 

Oil  Pump 78 

Overhanging  Arm           .........  77 

Speed  and  Feed  Table             .  147 

Spindle,  Table 77 

Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Attachment             102 

Vise 78 

No.  12  Plain  Milling  Machine. 

Accessories .82 

Automatic  Feed  of  Table Si 

Capacity 80 

Cone Si 

Counter-shaft 82 

Fitted  for  Use  in  Cutting  Sprocket  Wheels  and  Bicycle  Chain 

Centres 84 

Oil  Tank  and  Pump 82 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  241 

PAGE. 

Overhanging  Arm          ..........  8l 

Spindle,  Table 81 

Vise 82 

No.  13  Plain  Milling  Machine,  No.  3  Prior  to  1893. 

Accessories 88 

Automatic  Feed  of  Table 87 

Capacity 86 

Cone 87 

Counter-shaft 88 

Oil  Tank  and  Pump,  Overhanging  Arm        .  87 

Spindle,  Table         .         .         . 87 

Vise .88 

No.  23  Plain  Milling  Machine,  No.  5  Prior  to  1893. 

Accessories      ...........  92 

Automatic  Feed  of  Table        ........  91 

Capacity 90 

Cone        ............  91 

Counter-shaft,  Dials       .........  92 

Head,  Overhanging  Arm        ........  91 

Spindle,  Table 91 

Vise         ............  92 

No.  24  Plain  Milling  Machine,  No.  7  Prior  io  1893. 

Accessories     ...........  94 

Automatic  Feed  of  Table        ........  93 

Capacity,  Cone       ..........  93 

Counter-shaft,  Dials       .........  94 

Head,  Overhanging  Arm        .         .         .         .         .         .         .  93 

Spindle,  Table 93 

Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Attachment    ......  103 

Vise         ............  94 

Plate,  Index 176 

Position  of  Spiral  Bed  in  Cutting  Spirals    ......  215 

Pulley,  Main  Line,  Rule  for  Finding  Diameter  of       .         .         .  115 

Pump,  Oil,  Method  of  Attachment 68 

Rack  Teeth,  Milling 160 

Reamers  and  Taps,  Fluting 182 

Rounding  Ends  of  Pieces       .........  167 

Rules  for  Obtaining  Ratio  of  Gears  to  Cut  Spiral        ....  214 

Rule  for  Determining  Number  of  Teeth  of  Gears  to  Cut  Spiral         .  214 

Rule  for  Ascertaining  Spiral  Cut  by  any  given  Change  Gears  .         .  215 

Sharpening  Mills  or  Cutters          ........  136 

Sharpening  Angular  Cutters 137 

Sharpening  formed  Cutters           ........  137 

Sector 178 

Selection  of  Change  Gears  for  Cutting  Spirals   .....  212 


242  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 


Setting  Vise  with  Plain  Base         ...                                    .  148 

Setting  Cutters  for  Cutting  Spiials       .                   .....  224 

Sketches  of  Mills  or  Cutters           ........  134 

Skill,  Milling  Machines  and           .                   ......  119 

Slots,  Cutting         ..........          .  154 

Slot  Cutting  to  Close  Limit 160 

Small  Work,  Fixtures  for      .........  152 

Special  Operations         ..........  160 

Special  Vise  Jaws 152 

Speed,  Average,  of  Mills  or  Cutters     .......  142 

Speed  of  Counter-shafts         .         .         .         .         .         .          .         .         .  115 

Speed  of  Cutters  6"  and  Upward.     Addy.     Briggs               .         .         .  143 

SPEED  AND  FEED  TABLES  : 

No.  3  Plain  Milling  Machine           .......  145 

No.  4  Plain  Milling  Machine           .......  146 

No.  5  Plain  Milling  Machine           .          .          .         .         .                   .  147 

Speed  of  Mills        ...........  142 

Spindle,  Index,  Change  in  Angle  of  Elevation     .....  178 

Spindle,  Index,  Testing  Setting  of 184 

Spindle,  Method  of  Adjusting       ........  17 

Spirals,  Number  of  Teeth  of  Gears  for  Cutting            ....  214 

Spirals,  Change  Gears,  and  Angles,  Tables  of    .         .     218,  219,  220,  221 

Spirals,  Cutting  Left  Hand            ........  227 

Spirals,  Cutting,  with  End  Mills           .......  231 

Spiral  Bed,  Position  of,  in  Cutting  Spirals           .         .          .          .         .  215 

Spirals,  Milling  Cutters  used  for  Cutting             .....  224 

Spiral  Head  or  Indexing  Head  Stock,  Used  on  Nos.  i  and  4,  No.  3 
Prior  to  1893,  Universal  Milling  Machine.  See  Indexing 
Head  Stock. 

Construction  7.   10,   n,   12 

Change  Gears,  Chuck,  Crank  Pin          ......  10 

Cutting  Spirals,       ..........  10 

Cutting  Spirals  not  given  in  Tables        ......  13 

Elevation  of  Head            .........  10 

Sector 10 

Spiral  Head  or  Indexing  Head  Stock,  Used  on  Nos.  2,  3  and  4,  Uni- 
versal Milling  Machines,  Design  of  1893. 
Construction  .........         20,  22 

Foot-stock  Construction          ........  22 

Gauge  for  Adjusting  Centre            .......  24 

To  Throw  Worm  Out  of  Gear 22 

Squaring  Ends  of  Small  Pieces 149 

Stock,  Cutting  Off ...  149 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  243 


Stock  and  Special  Cutters 129 

Straddle  Mills,  Use  of 152 

TABLES: 

Change  Gears,  Spirals  and  Angles        .         .         .     218,  219,  220,  221 

Compound  Indexing 191,   192,  193,  194,  195 

Cutters,  Pitches,  Gears  and  Angles  for  Twist  Drills    .         .         .     225 
Cutters  for  Making  Straight-lipped  Twist  Drills  .         .         .     229 

Decimal  Equivalents       .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .1158 

Dimensions  of  Plain  Milling  Machines          ....         46,  47 

Dimensions  of  Universal  Milling  Machines  ....         4 

Direct  Indexing       .........     179,  180 

Extra  Divisions  by  Use  of  Back  Pin,  (Compound  Indexing)        .     198 
Feed  for  No.  I  Universal  Milling  Machine  ....         8 

For  Setting  when  Cutting  with  Tap  and  Reamer  Cutters    .         .     183 
Speed  and  Feed  No.  3  Plain  Milling  Machine       ....     145 

Speed  and  Feed  No.  4  Plain  Milling  Machine       ....     146 

Speed  and  Feed  No.  5  Plain  Milling  Machine       ....     147 

Tangents  and  Cotangents,  Natural        .         .  •    .         .     222,  223 
Taper  Milling  Attachment  for  Nos.  i  and  2  Universal  Milling  Ma- 
chine                 ......     107 

Taps  and  Reamers,  Fluting  ........     182 

Teeth  of  Mills  or  Cutters,  Number  of  .         .         .         .         .         .     131 

Teeth  of  Mills  or  Cutters,  Cutting  Angle  of 133 

Teeth,  Rule  for  Finding  Pitch  of  Cutters.     Addy        .         .         .         .133 

Tempering  of  Mills .         .         .131 

Templets  of  Mills  or  Cutters 136 

Tool  Makers  Universal  Vise in 

Tools,  Placing 117 

T  Slots,  Cored  in  Cast  Iron,  Cutting 160 

T  Slot  Cutters 158 

Testing  Method  of  Running  Cutter,  Experiments  for         .         .         .     141 

Testing  Setting  of  Index  Head  Spindle 184 

Twist  Drills,  Backing  Off 226 

Twist  Drill  Cutting 225 

Twist  Drills,  List  of  Cutters  for  Making     ......     230 

UNIVERSAL  MILLING  MACHINES  : 

Dimension  Table 4 

General  Description i 

No.  I  Universal  Milling  Machine. 

Accessories     ...........  13 

Adjustable  Dials,  Automatic  Feed  of  Table           ....  7 

Capacity ' 5 


244  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

PAGE. 

Cone        ............  6 

Countershaft 13 

Gear  Cutting  Attachment 98 

High  Speed  Milling  Attachment  and  Driving  Fixture          .         .  103 

Indexing  Head-stock  or  Spiral-head      ......  7 

Chuck,  Construction        ........  10 

Index  Plates 13 

Motion      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .10 

Spirals  not  given  in  Tables      .......  13 

Tables 10 

Knee 7 

Oiling 13 

Overhanging  Arm           .........  6 

Overhead  Works     ..........  13 

Saddle,  Spindle '      ....  6 

Stop  Rod 7 

Table 6 

Taper  Milling  Attachment     .                  .         .         .         ...         .  107 

Vise                             , 13 

Vertical  Spindle  Millig  Attachment 99 

No.  2  Universal  Milling  Machine. 

Accessories      ...........  24 

Adjustable  Dials,  Automatic  Feed  of  Table            ....  20 

Capacity  .         .         .         .         .         .         •         .         .         .         .16 

Cone 17 

Counter-shaft           ..........  24 

Feed  Tables 21 

Foot-stock  Construction 22 

Frame      .         .         .         .         .         •         •         •         •         .  ,     .         .24 

Gauge  for  Adjusting  Foot-stock  Spindle       .....  24 

High  Speed  Milling  Attachment  and  Driving  Fixture           .         .  103 
Index    Head-stock  or   Spiral    Head,    Construction,    Method    of 

Operating,  Tables 22 

Knee 20 

Overhanging  Arm           .........  17 

Saddle 20 

Spindle 17 

Stop  Rod 20 

Table .17 

Taper  Milling  Attachment 107 

Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Attachment 99 

Vise 24 

No.  3  Universal  Milling  Machine. 

Accessories •     '    .         •         •  33 

Adjustable  Dials,  Automatic  Feed  of  Table           ....  2^ 


BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO.  245 

PAGE. 

Capacity 26 

Cone        .............  27 

Counter-shaft           ..........  33 

Feed  Table 31 

Foot-stock,  Frame           .........  32 

Knee         ............  29 

Overhanging  Arm           .........  27 

Power  Transverse  Feed 27 

Saddle 29 

Spindle            .                          ........  27 

Spiral  Head              ..........  32 

Table 27 

Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Attachment     ......  99 

Vise 32 

No.  4  Universal  Milling  Machine,  Design  of  1893. 

Accessories     ...........  38 

Adjustable  Dials,  Automatic  Feed  of  Table           ....  36 

Capacity           ...........  34 

Cone 35 

Counter-shaft           ..........  38 

Feed  Table 37 

Foot-stock  Spindle 38 

Knee 36 

Overhanging  Arm           .........  35 

Power  Transverse  Feed           ........  35 

Saddle, 36 

Spindle             ...........  3^ 

Spiral  Head     .         . 36 

Table 35 

Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Attachment     ......  99 

Vise 38 

No  4  Universal  Milling  Machine,  No.  3  Prior  to  1893. 

Accessories      ...........  4-5 

Adjustable  Dials,  Automatic  Feed  of  Table           ....  41 

Capacity           ...........  40 

Cone 41 

Counter-shaft          ..........  43 

Overhanging  Arm           .........  41 

Spindle            ...........  41 

Spiral  Head  and  Foot-stock  Centres      .         .         .         .         .         -41 

Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Attachment 99 

Vise 43 

Universal  Vise,  Tool  Makers        .        .        .         .         .        .         .        .  in 

Use  of  Machines  in  Compound  Indexing     ....                  .  189 

Use  of  Milling  Machines,  Examples  of  Operations     ....  140 


246  BROWN    &    SHARPE    MFG.    CO. 

PAGB. 

Direction  in  which  Work  is  Moved  Under  Mills,  Experiments 
to  Test  Method  of  Running  Cutter,  Lubricant  for  Use  with 

Pump,  Oil  on  the  Cutters  or  Work           .                                   .  141 

Limits  in  Milling             .........  144 

Speed  of  Mills 142 

Use  of  Milling  Machines  in  Cutting  Spirals         .....  216 

Use  of  Oil  on  the  Cutters  or  Work 140 

Use  of  One  or  More  Mills  or  Cutters,  Simultaneous            .         .         .  150 
Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Machine,  No.  2. 

Accessories      ...........  97 

Automatic  Feed  of  Table 96 

Circular  Milling  Attachment          .         .         .          .         .         .         -97 

Cone 96 

Counter-shaft 97 

Spindle,  Table 96 

Vertical  Adjustment 96 

Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Attachments           ....       99,   102,  103 

Vertical  Spindle  Milling  Machine,  Samples  of  Work  done  on    .         .  167 

Vise  Jaws,  Special 152 

Vise  with  Plain  Base,  Setting       ........  148 

Vise,  Tool  Makers  Universal in 

Washers  and  Collars  for  Arbors 148 

Wheels,  Emery,  for  Sharpening  Mills  or  Cutters        ....  136 

Width  of  Face  of  Emery  Wheels  for  Grinding  Mills  or  Cutters           .  136 

Work  Done  on  Milling  Machines,  Examples  of            ....  149 

Work  Moved  Under  a  Mill,  Direction  of 141 

Worms,  Cutting 224 

Worm  Wheels,  Robbing,  Milling  Faces  of 186 


°  SEVENTH    DAY 


YC 


GENERAL  LIBRARY  -  U.C.  BERKELEY 


80005311,^? 


CMJf*) 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


. . 

:  |! 

• 


